transmission & driveline tm a
TRANSCRIPT
TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE
C
E
SECTION TMA
B
M
TTRANSAXLE & TRANSMISSION
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
CONTENTS
5AT: RE5R05A
BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 5
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ......... 5Work Flow .................................................................5Diagnostic Work Sheet ..............................................6
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 8
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM ..................................... 8System Diagram ........................................................8System Description ...................................................8Component Parts Location ......................................16Component Description ...........................................17
SHIFT MECHANISM ..........................................19Cross-Sectional View ..............................................19System Diagram ......................................................20System Description .................................................21Component Parts Location ......................................31Component Description ...........................................31
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM .......................................33System Description .................................................33Component Parts Location ......................................34Component Description ...........................................34
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ......35Diagnosis Description .............................................35
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) .............................38Diagnosis Description .............................................38CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) .............39
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS .........................45
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .............................45Description ..............................................................45DTC Logic ...............................................................45Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................45
P0615 STARTER RELAY ..................................46
Description ...............................................................46DTC Logic ................................................................46Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................46
P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL .................48Description ...............................................................48DTC Logic ................................................................48Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................48
P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A ...49Description ...............................................................49DTC Logic ................................................................49Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................49
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A ....................51Description ...............................................................51DTC Logic ................................................................51Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................51
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR ...................52Description ...............................................................52DTC Logic ................................................................52Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................53
P0725 ENGINE SPEED ....................................55Description ...............................................................55DTC Logic ................................................................55Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................55
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO .....................57Description ...............................................................57DTC Logic ................................................................57Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................58
P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO .....................59Description ...............................................................59DTC Logic ................................................................59Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................60
P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO .....................61Description ...............................................................61DTC Logic ................................................................61
TM-1Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 62
P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO ...................... 63Description .............................................................. 63DTC Logic ............................................................... 63Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 64
P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO ...................... 65Description .............................................................. 65DTC Logic ............................................................... 65Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 66
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER ......................... 67Description .............................................................. 67DTC Logic ............................................................... 67Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 67
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER ......................... 68Description .............................................................. 68DTC Logic ............................................................... 68Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 68
P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A ... 69Description .............................................................. 69DTC Logic ............................................................... 69Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 69
P1705 TP SENSOR ........................................... 70Description .............................................................. 70DTC Logic ............................................................... 70Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 70
P1710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERA-TURE SENSOR ................................................. 71
Description .............................................................. 71DTC Logic ............................................................... 71Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 71Component Inspection (A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 1) ................................................................ 73Component Inspection (A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2) ................................................................ 73
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL ..................... 74Description .............................................................. 74DTC Logic ............................................................... 74Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 74
P1730 INTERLOCK ........................................... 75Description .............................................................. 75DTC Logic ............................................................... 75Judgment of Interlock ............................................. 75Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 75
P1731 1ST ENGINE BRAKING ......................... 76Description .............................................................. 76DTC Logic ............................................................... 76Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 76
P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID .................. 77Description .............................................................. 77DTC Logic ............................................................... 77
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 77
P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID .................. 78Description .............................................................. 78DTC Logic ............................................................... 78Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 78
P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID ............... 79Description .............................................................. 79DTC Logic ............................................................... 79Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 79
P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID ........................................................ 80
Description .............................................................. 80DTC Logic ............................................................... 80Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 80
P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID ........ 81Description .............................................................. 81DTC Logic ............................................................... 81Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 81
P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID ........ 82Description .............................................................. 82DTC Logic ............................................................... 82Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 82
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH .................................. 84Description .............................................................. 84DTC Logic ............................................................... 84Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 84Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) ....... 86
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-CUIT ................................................................... 88
Description .............................................................. 88Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 88
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT .......... 90Description .............................................................. 90Component Function Check ................................... 90Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 90
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ...................................... 91Description .............................................................. 91Wiring Diagram - A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM - ...... 91Component Function Check ................................... 93Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 94Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) .......... 95Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) ............ 95
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR ... 97Description .............................................................. 97Component Function Check ................................... 97Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 97Component Inspection .......................................... 100
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............102
TCM ..................................................................102
TM-2Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
T
Reference Value ................................................... 102Wiring Diagram - A/T CONTROL SYSTEM - ........ 105Fail-Safe ................................................................ 111DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 113DTC Index ............................................................. 113
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 115
SYSTEM SYMPTOM ........................................ 115Symptom Table ..................................................... 115
PRECAUTION ............................................ 140
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 140Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" ............................................................... 140On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of A/T and En-gine ....................................................................... 140General Precautions ............................................. 141Service Notice or Precaution ................................. 141
PREPARATION ......................................... 143
PREPARATION ................................................ 143Special Service Tool ............................................. 143Commercial Service Tool ...................................... 144
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................... 145
A/T FLUID ......................................................... 145Changing ............................................................... 145Adjustment ............................................................ 146
A/T FLUID COOLER ........................................ 148Cleaning ................................................................ 148Inspection .............................................................. 150
STALL TEST .................................................... 151Inspection and Judgment ...................................... 151
LINE PRESSURE TEST ................................... 152Inspection and Judgment ...................................... 152
ROAD TEST ..................................................... 154Description ............................................................ 154Check Before Engine Is Started ............................ 154Check at Idle ......................................................... 154Cruise Test - Part 1 ............................................... 155Cruise Test - Part 2 ............................................... 156Cruise Test - Part 3 ............................................... 156
A/T POSITION .................................................. 158
2WD ......................................................................... 1582WD : Inspection and Adjustment ......................... 158
AWD ......................................................................... 158AWD : Inspection and Adjustment ........................ 158
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 160
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR .................................... 160
2WD ..........................................................................1602WD : Exploded View ............................................1602WD : Removal and Installation ............................1612WD : Inspection ...................................................162
AWD .........................................................................162AWD : Exploded View ...........................................163AWD : Removal and Installation ............................164AWD : Inspection ...................................................165
CONTROL ROD .............................................. 166Exploded View .......................................................166Removal and Installation .......................................166Inspection and Adjustment ....................................166
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM ....................... 168Exploded View .......................................................168Removal and Installation .......................................168Inspection ..............................................................173
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 ........ 174Exploded View .......................................................174Removal and Installation .......................................174Inspection ..............................................................176
PARKING COMPONENTS ............................. 177
2WD ..........................................................................1772WD : Exploded View ............................................1772WD : Removal and Installation ............................1772WD : Inspection ...................................................181
REAR OIL SEAL ............................................. 183
2WD ..........................................................................1832WD : Exploded View ............................................1832WD : Removal and Installation ............................1832WD : Inspection and Adjustment .........................184
AWD .........................................................................184AWD : Exploded View ...........................................184AWD : Removal and Installation ............................184AWD : Inspection and Adjustment .........................185
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR ............................. 186
2WD ..........................................................................1862WD : Exploded View ............................................1862WD : Removal and Installation ............................1862WD : Inspection and Adjustment .........................190
AIR BREATHER HOSE .................................. 191
2WD ..........................................................................1912WD : Exploded View ............................................1912WD : Removal and Installation ............................191
AWD .........................................................................192AWD : Exploded View ...........................................192AWD : Removal and Installation ............................192
A/T FLUID COOLER TUBE ............................ 194
TM-3Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
2WD ..........................................................................1942WD : Exploded View ............................................1942WD : Removal and Installation ............................1942WD : Inspection and Adjustment .........................195
AWD .........................................................................195AWD : Exploded View ...........................................196AWD : Removal and Installation ............................196AWD : Inspection and Adjustment .........................197
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ....198
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ......................... 198
2WD ..........................................................................1982WD : Exploded View ............................................1982WD : Removal and Installation ............................1982WD : Inspection and Adjustment .........................200
AWD .........................................................................200AWD : Exploded View ...........................................201AWD : Removal and Installation ............................201AWD : Inspection and Adjustment .........................203
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ...204
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ......................... 204Exploded View .......................................................204Oil Channel ............................................................211Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings ...........................213Disassembly ..........................................................214Assembly ...............................................................232Inspection ..............................................................255
OIL PUMP ........................................................ 256Exploded View .......................................................256Disassembly ..........................................................256Assembly ...............................................................257
FRONT SUN GEAR, 3RD ONE-WAY CLUTCH ........................................................... 259
Exploded View .......................................................259Disassembly ..........................................................259Assembly ...............................................................260Inspection ..............................................................260
FRONT CARRIER, INPUT CLUTCH, REAR INTERNAL GEAR .............................................261
Exploded View ...................................................... 261Disassembly .......................................................... 262Assembly .............................................................. 263Inspection .............................................................. 265
MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH HUB ..............266
Exploded View ...................................................... 266Disassembly .......................................................... 266Assembly .............................................................. 268Inspection .............................................................. 270
HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH .............271Exploded View ...................................................... 271Disassembly .......................................................... 271Assembly .............................................................. 271Inspection .............................................................. 272
DIRECT CLUTCH .............................................273Exploded View ...................................................... 273Disassembly .......................................................... 273Assembly .............................................................. 273Inspection .............................................................. 274
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .........................................................275
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................275
General Specification ............................................ 275Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs ..... 275Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releas-es .......................................................................... 275Stall Speed ............................................................ 275Line Pressure ........................................................ 276Input Speed Sensor .............................................. 276Output Speed Sensor ........................................... 276Reverse Brake ...................................................... 276Total End Play ....................................................... 276Torque Converter .................................................. 276
TM-4Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< BASIC INSPECTION >
T
BASIC INSPECTIONDIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000005171676
INTRODUCTIONThe TCM receives a signal from the output speed sensor, accelera-tor pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor) or transmissionrange switch. Then provides shift control or lock-up control via A/Tsolenoid valves.The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signaltransmitted from sensing elements used with the OBD-related partsof the A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM iscapable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can storemalfunctions in its memory.Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in theoperation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good oper-ating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunc-tion, etc.
It is much more difficult to diagnose an error that occurs intermit-tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent errors are causedby poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, carefulchecking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement ofgood parts.A visual check may not find the cause of the errors. A road test withCONSULT-III (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be per-formed. Follow the “DETAILED FLOW”.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with thecustomer who has the driveability complaint. The customer can sup-ply good information about such errors, especially intermittent ones.Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions theyoccur. A “Diagnostic work sheet” as shown in the example (Refer toTM-6) should be used.Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” errors first. This willhelp troubleshoot driveability errors on an electronically controlledengine vehicle.Also check related Service bulletins.
DETAILED FLOW
1.COLLECT THE INFORMATION FROM THE CUSTOMER
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment whenthe incident/malfunction occurred) using diagnosis worksheet. Refer to TM-6, "Diagnostic Work Sheet".
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SYMPTOM 1
Check the following items based on the information obtained from the customer.• Fail-safe. Refer to TM-111, "Fail-Safe".• A/T fluid leakage.• Stall test. Refer to TM-151, "Inspection and Judgment".• Line pressure test. Refer to TM-152, "Inspection and Judgment".
SAT631IB
SAT632I
SEF234G
TM-5Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.• Record DTC.• Erase DTC. Refer to TM-35, "Diagnosis Description".Is any DTC detected?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> GO TO 6.
4.PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Perform “Diagnosis Procedure” for the displayed DTC.
>> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” for the displayed DTC.Is any DTC detected?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK SYMPTOM 2
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.Is any malfunction present?YES >> GO TO 7.NO >> INSPECTION END
7.ROAD TEST
Perform “ROAD TEST”. Refer to TM-154, "Description".
>> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK SYMPTOM 3
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.Is any malfunction present?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnostic Work Sheet INFOID:0000000005171677
INFORMATION FROM CUSTOMER
KEY POINTS• WHAT..... Vehicle and A/T model• WHEN..... Date, Frequencies• WHERE..... Road conditions• HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
Customer name MR/MS Model and Year VIN
Trans. Model Engine Mileage
Malfunction Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
Frequency Continuous Intermittent ( times a day)
TM-6Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< BASIC INSPECTION >
T
DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET
Symptoms Vehicle does not move. ( Any position Particular position)
No up-shift ( 1st → 2nd 2nd → 3rd 3rd → 4th 4th → 5th)
No down-shift ( 5th → 4th 4th → 3rd 3rd → 2nd 2nd → 1st)
Lock-up malfunction
Shift point too high or too low.
Shift shock or slip ( N → D N → R Lock-up Any drive position)
Noise or vibration
No kick down
No pattern select
Others( )
A/T CHECK indicator lamp Continuously lit Not lit
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) Continuously lit Not lit
1 Read the item on cautions concerning fail-safe and understand the customer's complaint. TM-111
2
A/T fluid inspection, stall test and line pressure test
A/T fluid leakage
Stall test
TM-151
Torque converter one-way clutch Front brake High and low reverse clutch Low coast brake Forward brake Reverse brake Forward one-way clutch
1st one-way clutch 3rd one-way clutch Engine Line pressure low Except for input clutch and direct
clutch, clutches and brakes OK
Line pressure test - Suspected part: TM-152
3 Perform self-diagnosis. — Check detected items to repair or replace malfunctioning part. TM-39
4
Perform road test.
4-1 Check before engine is started TM-154
4-2 Check at idle TM-154
4-3 Cruise test
Part 1 TM-155
Part 2 TM-156
Part 3 TM-156
Check malfunction phenomena to repair or replace malfunctioning part after completing all road tests.Refer to TM-115, "Symptom Table".
5 Drive vehicle to check that the malfunction phenomenon has been resolved.
6 Erase the results of the self-diagnosis from the TCM and the ECM. EC-104, TM-35
TM-7Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONA/T CONTROL SYSTEM
System Diagram INFOID:0000000005171678
System Description INFOID:0000000005171679
The A/T senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always controls the opti-mum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
TCM FUNCTIONThe function of the TCM is to:• Receive input signals transmitted from various switches and sensors.• Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, engine brake operation, etc.• Transmit required output signals to the respective solenoids.
Input/Output Signal of TCM
JSDIA1374GB
SENSORS (or SIGNALS)
⇒
TCM
⇒
ACTUATORS
Transmission range switchAccelerator pedal position signalClosed throttle position signalWide open throttle position signalEngine speed signalA/T fluid temperature sensorOutput speed sensorVehicle speed signalManual mode switch signalStop lamp switch signalInput speed sensorATF pressure switch
Shift controlLine pressure controlLock-up controlEngine brake controlTiming controlFail-safe controlSelf-diagnosisCONSULT-III communication lineDuet-EA controlCAN system
Input clutch solenoid valve Direct clutch solenoid valve Front brake solenoid valveHigh and low reverse clutch sole-noid valveLow coast brake solenoid valveTorque converter clutch solenoid valveLine pressure solenoid valveA/T CHECK indicator lampBack-up lamp relayStarter relay
TM-8Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
T
*1: Spare for output speed sensor.
*2: Spare for accelerator pedal position signal.
*3: If these input and output signals are different, the TCM triggers the fail-safe function.
*4: Used as a condition for starting self-diagnostics; if self-diagnostics are not started, it is judged that there is some kind of error.
*5: Input by CAN communications.
*6: Output by CAN communications.
CAN COMMUNICATIONCAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with othercontrol units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Refer to LAN-27, "CANCommunication Signal Chart".
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL• When an input torque signal equivalent to the engine drive force is transmitted from the ECM to the TCM,
the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid valve.
Control itemLine
pressurecontrol
Vehicle speed control
Shift control
Lock-up control
Engine brake control
Fail-safe
function *3
Self-diag-nostics function
Input
Accelerator pedal position signal *5 X X X X X X X
Output speed sensor X X X X X X X
Vehicle speed signal *1, *5 X
Closed throttle position signal *5 X *2 X X X X *4
Wide open throttle position signal *5 X X *4
Input speed sensor 1 X X X X X
Input speed sensor 2(for 4th speed only)
X X X X X
Engine speed signals *5 X X X X X X X
Stop lamp switch signal *5 X X X X *4
A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2 X X X X X X
ASCD or ICC sensor inte-grated unit
Operation signal *5 X X X
Overdrive cancel
signal *5X
Out-put
Direct clutch solenoid X X X X
Input clutch solenoid X X X X
High and low reverse clutch solenoid X X X X
Front brake solenoid X X X X
Low coast brake solenoid(ATF pressure switch 2)
X X X X X
Line pressure solenoid X X X X X X X
TCC solenoid X X X
A/T CHECK indicator lamp *6 X *4
Starter relay X X
TM-9Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >• This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the pres-
sure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the drivingstate.
Line Pressure Control is Based On The TCM Line Pressure Characteristic Pattern• The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the
driving state.• In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM
controls the line pressure solenoid current value and thus controls the line pressure.
Normal Control• Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the
engine drive force.
Back-up Control (Engine Brake)• When the select operation is performed during driving and the A/T
is shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the vehiclespeed.
During Shift Change
PCIA0007E
PCIA0008E
PCIA0009E
TM-10Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
T
• The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set.For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to inputtorque and gearshift selection. Also, line pressure characteristiccorresponds to engine speed, during engine brake operation.
At Low Fluid Temperature• When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed tem-
perature, in order to speed up the action of each friction element,the line pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure char-acteristic.
SHIFT CONTROLThe clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, theclutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomespossible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change charac-teristic is attained.
Shift ChangeThe clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque informa-tion, etc.
PCIA0010E
PCIA0011E
PCIA0012E
TM-11Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >Shift Change System Diagram
*1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oilpressure in real-time to achieve the best gear ratio.
Blipping ControlThis system makes transmission clutch engage readily by controlling (synchronizing) engine revolutionaccording to the (calculation of) engine revolution after shifting down.• “BLIPPING CONTROL” functions.- When downshifting by accelerator pedal depression at “D” position.- When downshifting under the manual mode.• TCM selects “BLIPPING CONTROL” or “NORMAL SHIFT CONTROL” according to the gear position, the
selector lever position, the engine torque and the speed when accelerating by pedal depression.• Revolution control demand signal is transmitted from TCM to ECM under “BLIPPING CONTROL”.• TCM synchronizes engine revolution according to the revolution control demand signal.
Shift Change System Diagram
ASC (Adoptive Shift Control)ASC automatically shifts or hold at the 2GR, 3GR or 4GR on certain roads (up/down slope and curve) anddriving condition.
PCIA0013E
SCIA6483E
TM-12Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
T
When Driving On an Up/Down Slope• ASC judges up/down slope according to engine torque data transmitted from the ECM and vehicle speed.
Fixing at 3GR or 4GR on an up-slope prevents shift hunting and controls the vehicle to gain optimum drivingforce. On a down-slope, automatic shift-down to the 3GR or 4GR controls to gain optimum engine brake.
When Driving On a Curve• TCM receives the lateral G sensor signal from the ABS actuator control unit. It locks to 3GR or 4GR position
in moderate cornering or to the 2GR position in sharp cornering based on this signal. This prevents anyupshift and kickdown during cornering, maintaining smooth vehicle travel.
DS Mode• Changes to the shift schedule that mainly utilizes the high engine speed zone when ASC is active.• DS mode can be switched according to the following method.- When the selector lever is in the “D” position, shifting the selector lever to manual shift gate enables switch-
ing to DS mode.- When in DS mode, shifting the selector lever to the main gate enables to cancel DS mode.
LOCK-UP CONTROLThe torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip toincrease power transmission efficiency.The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid valve,which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releasesthe torque converter clutch piston.
Lock-up operation condition table
Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve ControlLock-up control system diagram
SCIA6469E
Selector lever “D” position “M” position
Gear position 5 4 3 5 4 3
Lock-up × – – × × ×
Slip lock-up × × × – – –
TM-13Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Lock-up Released• In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.
Lock-up Applied• In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated.In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
Smooth Lock-up ControlWhen shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque con-verter clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, thetorque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.
Half-clutched State• The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to steadily increase the
torque converter clutch solenoid pressure.In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put intohalf-clutched states, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling iscompleted smoothly.
Slip Lock-up Control• In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the
half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed.This raises the fuel efficiency for 3GR, 4GR and 5GR at both low speed and when the accelerator has a lowdegree of opening.
ENGINE BRAKE CONTROL• The forward one-way clutch transmits the drive force from the engine to the rear wheels. But the reverse
drive from the rear wheels is not transmitted to the engine because the one-way clutch is idling.Therefore, the low coast brake solenoid is operated to prevent the forward one-way clutch from idling andthe engine brake is operated in the same manner as conventionally.
PCIA0014E
TM-14Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
T
• The operation of the low coast brake solenoid switches the low coast brake switching valve and controls thecoupling and releasing of the low coast brake.The low coast brake reducing valve controls the low coast brake coupling force.
SCIA1520E
TM-15Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005171680
*: Control valve with TCM is included in A/T assembly.
NOTE:• The following components are included in A/T shift selector assembly (2).- Manual mode select switch- Manual mode position select switch- Shift position switch• The following components are included in control valve with TCM (8).- TCM- Input speed sensor 1, 2- Output speed sensor- A/T fluid temperature sensor 1, 2- Transmission range switch- Line pressure solenoid valve- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve- Direct clutch solenoid valve
1. Selector lever position indicator 2. A/T shift selector assembly 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor
4. Manual mode indicator 5. Shift position indicator 6. A/T CHECK indicator lamp
7. A/T assembly connector 8. Control valve with TCM*
A. Center console B. Accelerator pedal C. Combination meter
D. A/T assembly
JPDIA0670ZZ
TM-16Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
T
- High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve- Input clutch solenoid valve- Front brake solenoid valve- Low coast brake solenoid valve- ATF pressure switch 2
Component Description INFOID:0000000005171681
Name Function
TCM TM-48, "Description"
Transmission range switch TM-49, "Description"
Output speed sensor TM-52, "Description"
Input speed sensor 1TM-51, "Description"
Input speed sensor 2
A/T fluid temperature sensor 1TM-71, "Description"
A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
Input clutch solenoid valve TM-77, "Description"
Front brake solenoid valve TM-78, "Description"
Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-79, "Description"
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-80, "Description"
Low coast brake solenoid valve TM-81, "Description"
ATF pressure switch 2 (LC/B)Detects any malfunction in the low coast brake hydraulic pressure. When it detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Torque converter regulator valveIn order to prevent the pressure supplied to the torque converter from being excessive, the line pressure is adjusted to the optimum pressure (torque converter operating pres-sure).
Pressure regulator valvePressure regulator plugPressure regulator sleeve
Adjusts the oil discharged from the oil pump to the optimum pressure (line pressure) for the driving state.
Front brake control valveWhen the front brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (front brake pressure) and supplies it to the front brake. (In 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, and 5GR, adjusts the clutch pressure.)
Accumulator control valveAdjusts the pressure (accumulator control pressure) acting on the accumulator piston and low coast reducing valve to the pressure appropriate to the driving state.
Pilot valve AAdjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required for line pressure control, shift change control, and lock-up control.
Pilot valve BAdjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required for shift change control.
Low coast brake switching valve During engine braking, supplies the line pressure to the low coast brake reducing valve.
Low coast brake reducing valveWhen the low coast brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (low coast brake pressure) and supplies it to the low coast brake.
N-R accumulator Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-R is selected.
Direct clutch piston switching valve Operates in 4GR and switches the direct clutch coupling capacity.
High and low reverse clutch control valveWhen the high and low reverse clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the opti-mum pressure (high and low reverse clutch pressure) and supplies it to the high and low reverse clutch. (In 1GR, 3GR, 4GR and 5GR, adjusts the clutch pressure.)
Input clutch control valveWhen the input clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (in-put clutch pressure) and supplies it to the input clutch. (In 4GR and 5GR, adjusts the clutch pressure.)
Direct clutch control valveWhen the direct clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (direct clutch pressure) and supplies it to the direct clutch. (In 2GR, 3GR, and 4GR, ad-justs the clutch pressure.)
TM-17Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
TCC control valveTCC control plugTCC control sleeve
Switches the lock-up to operating or released. Also, by performing the lock-up operation transiently, lock-up smoothly.
Torque converter lubrication valveOperates during lock-up to switch the torque converter, cooling, and lubrication system oil passage.
Cool by-pass valve Allows excess oil to bypass cooler circuit without being fed into it.
Line pressure relief valve Discharges excess oil from line pressure circuit.
N-D accumulator Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-D is selected.
Manual valveTransmits line pressure to each circuit according to the select position. The circuits to which the line pressure is not transmitted drain.
Accelerator pedal position sensorTM-70, "Description"
Throttle position sensor
Manual mode switch TM-84, "Description"
Starter relay TM-46, "Description"
Name Function
TM-18Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SHIFT MECHANISM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
T
SHIFT MECHANISM
Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000005171682
2WD MODELS
AWD MODELS
1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear
4. Direct clutch 5. High and low reverse clutch 6. Reverse brake
7. Drum support 8. Forward brake 9. Low coast brake
10. Input shaft 11. Torque converter 12. Oil pump
13. 3rd one-way clutch 14. Front brake 15. Input clutch
16. 1st one-way clutch 17. Control valve with TCM 18. Forward one-way clutch
19. Rear extension 20. Output shaft
SCIA6946E
TM-19Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
System Diagram INFOID:0000000005171683
1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear
4. Direct clutch 5. High and low reverse clutch 6. Reverse brake
7. Drum support 8. Forward brake 9. Low coast brake
10. Input shaft 11. Torque converter 12. Oil pump
13. 3rd one-way clutch 14. Front brake 15. Input clutch
16. 1st one-way clutch 17. Control valve with TCM 18. Forward one-way clutch
19. Adapter case 20. Output shaft
SCIA6947E
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
PCIA0002J
TM-20Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SHIFT MECHANISM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
T
System Description INFOID:0000000005171684
DESCRIPTIONWith the use of 3 sets of planetary gears, A/T enables 5-speed transmission for forward and 1-speed transmis-sion for backward, depending on the combination of 3 sets of multiple-disc clutches, 3 sets of multiple-discbrakes, a brake band, and 3 sets of one-way clutches.
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl
TM-21Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
POWER TRANSMISSION
“N” PositionSince both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, torque from the input shaft drive is not trans-mitted to the output shaft.
“P” Position
JSDIA1376GB
TM-22Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SHIFT MECHANISM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
T
• The same as for the “N” position, both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, so torque fromthe input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft.
• The parking pawl linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaftmechanically.
“D1” and “DS1” Positions• The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear.• The 1st one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the rear sun gear.• The 3rd one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear.• During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and the engine
brake is not activated.
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl
PCIA0003J
TM-23Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
“M1” Position• The front brake fastens the front sun gear.• The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear.• High and low reverse clutch connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear.• The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear.• During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine brake
functions.
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl
SCIA1512E
TM-24Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SHIFT MECHANISM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
T
“D2” and “DS2” Positions• The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear.• The 3rd one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear.• The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.• During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and engine brake is
not activated.
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl
SCIA1513E
TM-25Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
“M2” Position• The front brake fastens the front sun gear.• The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear.• The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.• The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear.• During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine brake
functions.
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl
SCIA1514E
TM-26Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SHIFT MECHANISM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
T
“D3”, “DS3” and “M3” Positions• The front brake fastens the front sun gear.• The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.• The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl
SCIA1515E
TM-27Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
“D4”, “DS4” and “M4” Positions• The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.• The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.• The input clutch is coupled, and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected.• The drive power is conveyed to the front internal gear, mid internal gear, and rear carrier and the three plan-
etary gears rotate forward as one unit.
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl
SCIA1516E
TM-28Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SHIFT MECHANISM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
T
“D5”, “DS5” and “M5” Positions• The front brake fastens the front sun gear.• The input clutch is coupled, and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected.• The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl
SCIA1517E
TM-29Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
“R” Position• The front brake fastens the front sun gear.• The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.• The reverse brake fastens the rear carrier.
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl
SCIA4984E
TM-30Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SHIFT MECHANISM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
T
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005171685
Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".
Component Description INFOID:0000000005171686
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl
SCIA1519E
Name of the Part (Abbreviation) Function
Front brake (FR/B) Fastens the front sun gear.
Input clutch (I/C) Connects the input shaft, the front internal gear and the mid internal gear.
Direct clutch (D/C) Connects the rear carrier and the rear sun gear.
High and low reverse clutch (HLR/C) Connects the mid sun gear and the rear sun gear.
Reverse brake (R/B) Fastens the rear carrier.
Forward brake (Fwd/B) Fastens the mid sun gear.
Low coast brake (LC/B) Fastens the mid sun gear.
1st one-way clutch (1st OWC)Allows the rear sun gear to turn freely forward relative to the mid sun gear but fastens it for reverse rotation.
Forward one-way clutch (Fwd OWC)Allows the mid sun gear to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse ro-tation.
TM-31Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
3rd one-way clutch (3rd OWC)Allows the front sun gear to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse ro-tation.
Torque converter Amplifies driving force the engine, and transmits it to transmission input shaft.
Oil pumpDriven by the engine, oil pump supplies oil to torque converter, control valve assembly, and each lubricating system.
Name of the Part (Abbreviation) Function
TM-32Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
T
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
System Description INFOID:0000000005171687
• Shift lock prevents an unintentional start of the vehicle that may be caused by an incorrect operation whileselector lever is in the “P” position.
• Selector lever can be shifted from the “P” position to another position when the following conditions are sat-isfied.
- Ignition switch ON- Stop lamp switch is ON (brake pedal is depressed)- Selector lever knob button is pressed
SHIFT LOCK OPERATION AT “P” POSITION
When Brake Pedal Is Not Depressed (No Shift Operation Allowed)The shift lock solenoid (A) inside the shift lock unit is not energized ifthe brake pedal is not depressed while the ignition switch is ON.The lock plate (B) lowers according to the downward movement ofthe position pin (C) when the selector button (D) is pressed, andpresses only slider B (E) into the shift lock unit. Slider A (F) locatedbelow the lock plate prevents the downward movement of the lockplate with the spring force. The selector lever cannot be shifted fromthe “P” position for this reason.However, slider A is forcibly pressed into the shift lock unit, allowingthe selector lever to shift if the shift lock release button is pressed.
When Brake Pedal Is Depressed (Shift Operation Allowed)The shift lock solenoid (A) inside the shift lock unit is energized andthe relative positions of sliders A (B) and B (C) are maintained whenthe brake pedal is depressed while the ignition switch is ON.The lock plate (D) lowers according to the downward movement ofthe position pin (E), thrusting away sliders A and B, when the selec-tor button (F) is pressed.The position pin lowers to the position that allows shift operation forthis reason. As a result, the selector lever can be shifted out of the Pposition.
OPERATION AT OTHER THAN “P” POSITIONThe shift lock function will not operate at any position other than “P”because the lock plate (A) is only set for the “P” position. Accord-ingly, the selector lever can be shifted to any position regardless ofthe brake operation.The position pin (B) enters the “P” position thrusting away the lockplate when the selector lever is shifted to the “P” position. Then, theshift mechanism is locked when the selector button (C) is released.
“P” POSITION RETAINING MECHANISM (IGNITION SWITCH LOCK)When ignition switch is not in the ON position, power is not applied to the shift lock solenoid in the shift lockunit. This causes shift lock state, and then “P” position is retained.When an actuating system in the shift lock unit has a malfunction, selector lever is unable to operate from the“P” position even when pressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch ON. However, when pressing the shiftlock release button, slider A is forcibly pressed into the shift lock unit. This allows shift lock to be released andselector lever enables the select operation from the “P” position.CAUTION:
JSDIA0119ZZ
JSDIA0120ZZ
JSDIA0121ZZ
TM-33Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >Do not use the shift lock release button except when the select lever is inoperative even when press-ing the brake pedal with the ignition switch ON.
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005171688
*: Shift lock release button becomes operative by removing shift lock cover.
Component Description INFOID:0000000005171689
1. Position pin 2. Shift lock unit 3. Shift lock solenoid
4. Slider A 5. A/T shift selector connector 6. Lock plate
7. Slider B 8. Stop lamp switch 9. Brake pedal
10. Shift lock cover *
A. A/T shift selector assembly B. Brake pedal, upper C. Center console
JPDIA0990ZZ
Component Function
Shift lock unit
Shift lock solenoidActivated by the ignition switch and stop lamp signals, it holds the relative positions of sliders A and B.
Lock plate Restricts position pin moving.
Shift lock release button Pressing the shift lock release button cancels the shift lock forcibly.
Position pin Links with selector knob button and restricts selector lever shift operation.
Stop lamp switch• When brake pedal is depressed, stop lamp switch turns ON.• When stop lamp switch turns ON, power is supplied to shift lock unit.
TM-34Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
T
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000005171690
DESCRIPTIONThe A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combinationwith the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC inthe ECM memory but not the TCM memory.The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the A/T CHECK indicator lamp. The malfunction isstored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail,refer to TM-39, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)".
OBD-II FUNCTIONThe ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One functionis to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is transmitted tothe ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate adiagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switchesand solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.The MIL automatically illuminates in “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” when a malfunction is sensed in rela-tion to A/T system parts.
ONE OR TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC OF OBD-II
One Trip Detection LogicIf a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL illuminates and the ECM memory stores the mal-function as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
Two Trip Detection LogicWhen a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL does not illuminate. — 1st tripIf the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive,the MIL will illuminate. — 2nd tripThe “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performedduring vehicle operation.
OBD-II DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE (DTC)
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTCDTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.( With CONSULT-III or GST) CONSULT-III or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0720 etc.These DTC are prescribed by SAE J2012.(CONSULT-III also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)• 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.• Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. How-
ever, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring oroccurred in the past and returned to normal.CONSULT-III can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT-III (if available) is recom-mended.
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame DataThe ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculatedload value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehiclespeed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data,and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-IIIor GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, not on the GST. Fordetail, refer to EC-117, "CONSULT-III Function".Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in theECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priorityfor 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, oncefreeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
TM-35Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-lowing priorities to update the data.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM mem-ory is erased.
How to Erase DTCThe diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-III, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE asdescribed following.• If the battery cable is disconnected from the terminal, the DTC will be lost within 24 hours.• When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-III or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode
selector on the ECM.The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTCrelated to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-533, "DTC Index".• Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)• 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)• Freeze frame data• 1st trip freeze frame data• System readiness test (SRT) codes• Test values
How to Erase DTC (With CONSULT-III)1. The emission related diagnostic information in the TCM and ECM can be erased by selecting “All Erase”
in the “Description” of “FINAL CHECK” mode with CONSULT-III.
How to Erase DTC (With GST)1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.2. Perform “Erase Self-diagnosis”. Refer to TM-38, "Diagnosis Description".3. Perform “How to Erase DTC (WITH GST)”. Refer to EC-104, "Diagnosis Description".
How to Erase DTC (No tools)1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.2. Perform “Erase Self-diagnosis”. Refer to TM-38, "Diagnosis Description".3. Perform “How to Erase DTC (No tools)”. Refer to EC-104, "Diagnosis Description".
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST)Refer to EC-125, "Diagnosis Tool Function".
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)Refer to “MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)”. Refer to EC-104, "Diagnosis Description".
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)
Description
Priority Items
1Freeze frame data
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data
TM-36Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
T
• The MIL is located on the combination meters.1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check. If the MIL does notlight up, refer to EC-480, "Component Function Check".
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system hasdetected engine system malfunction.
SEF217U
TM-37Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000005171691
TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
DescriptionAs a method for locating the suspected circuit, when the self-diagnostics start signal is input, the memory forthe malfunction location is output and the A/T CHECK indicator lamp flashes to display the correspondingDTC.
Operation Procedure
1. Start the engine with selector lever in “P” position. Warm engine to normal operating temperature.2. Turn ignition switch ON and OFF at least twice, then leave it in the OFF position.3. Wait 10 seconds.4. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start the engine.)5. Check A/T CHECK indicator lamp comes on for about 2 seconds.
CAUTION:If A/T CHECK indicator lamp does not come on, refer to TM-115, "Symptom Table".
6. Turn ignition switch OFF.7. Keep pressing shift lock release button.8. Shift the selector lever from “P” to “D” position.9. Release accelerator pedal. (Set the closed throttle position signal ON.)10. Depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal ON.)11. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start the engine.)12. Wait 3 seconds.13. Shift the selector lever to the manual shift gate side. (Manual mode signal ON.)14. Release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal OFF.)15. Shift the selector lever to “D” position. (Manual mode signal OFF.)16. Depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal ON.)17. Release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal OFF.)18. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.19. Check A/T CHECK indicator lamp. Refer to “Judgment Self-diagnosis Code”.
CAUTION:If the system does not go into self-diagnosis, refer to TM-115, "Symptom Table".
Judgment Self-diagnosis Code
TM-38Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
T
If there is a malfunction, the lamp lights up for the time corresponding to the suspect circuit.
Erase Self-diagnosisIn order to make it easier to find the cause of hard-to-duplicate malfunctions, malfunction information is storedinto the control unit as necessary during use by the user. This memory is not erased no matter how manytimes the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF. However, this information is erased by turning ignition switch OFF after performing self-diagnostics or by eras-ing the memory using the CONSULT-III.
CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) INFOID:0000000005171692
CONSULT-III APPLICATION ITEMS
No. Malfunctioning item No. Malfunctioning item
1 Output speed sensor TM-52 12 Interlock TM-75
2 Direct clutch solenoid TM-79 13 1st engine braking TM-76
3 Torque converter TM-67, TM-68 14 Starter relay TM-46
4 Line pressure solenoid TM-69 15 Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
5 Input clutch solenoid TM-77 16 Engine speed TM-55
6 Front brake solenoid TM-78 17 CAN communication line TM-45
7 Low coast brake solenoid valve TM-81, TM-82 18 1GR incorrect ratio TM-57
8 High and low reverse clutch solenoid TM-80 19 2GR incorrect ratio TM-59
9 Transmission range switch TM-49 20 3GR incorrect ratio TM-61
10 A/T fluid temperature sensor TM-71 21 4GR incorrect ratio TM-63
11 Input speed sensor TM-51 22 5GR incorrect ratio TM-65
JPDIA0024GB
TM-39Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
*: Although“ Function Test” is selectable, do not use it.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Display Items ListRefer to TM-113, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
Display Items List
X: Standard, —: Not applicable, : Option
Diagnostic test mode Function
Self Diagnostic Results Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic item.
Data Monitor Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time.
CAN Diagnosis This mode displays a network diagnosis result about CAN by a diagram.
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor
It monitors the status of CAN communication.
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECU Identification Display the ECU identification number (part number etc.) of the selected system.
Function Test*This mode can show results of self-diagnosis of ECU with either "OK" or "NG". For engine, more prac-tical tests regarding sensors/switches and/or actuators are available.
Monitored item (Unit)
Monitor Item Selection
RemarksECU IN-PUT SIG-
NALS
MAIN SIG-NALS
SELEC-TION FROM ITEM
VHCL/S SE-A/T (km/h or mph) X X Output speed sensor
VHCL/S SE-MTR (km/h or mph) X — —
ACCELE POSI (0.0/8) X — Accelerator pedal position signal
THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) X X
Degree of opening for accelerator recognized by the TCM.For fail-safe operation, the specific value used for control is displayed.
CLSD THL POS (On/Off) X —Signal input with CAN communications.
W/O THL POS (On/Off) X —
GEAR — XGear position recognized by the TCM updated after gear-shifting.
ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X —
INPUT SPEED (rpm) X X —
OUTPUT REV (rpm) X X —
GEAR RATIO — X —
TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) — XDifference between engine speed and torque converter input shaft speed.
F SUN GR REV (rpm) — — —
F CARR GR REV (rpm) — — —
ATF TEMP SE 1 (V) X — —
ATF TEMP SE 2 (V) X — —
ATF TEMP 1 (°C or °F) — X Temperature of A/T fluid in the oil pan.
TM-40Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
T
ATF TEMP 2 (°C or °F) — XTemperature of A/T fluid at the exit of torque con-verter.
BATTERY VOLT (V) X — —
ATF PRES SW 1 (On/Off) X X —
ATF PRES SW 2 (On/Off) X X (For LC/B solenoid)
ATF PRES SW 3 (On/Off) X X —
ATF PRES SW 5 (On/Off) X X —
ATF PRES SW 6 (On/Off) X X —
RANGE SW 1 (On/Off) X — —
RANGE SW 2 (On/Off) X — —
RANGE SW 3 (On/Off) X — —
RANGE SW 4 (On/Off) X — —
SLCT LVR POSI — XSelector lever position is recognized by the TCM.For fail-safe operation, the specific value used for control is displayed.
MANU MODE SW (On/Off) X — —
NON M-MODE SW (On/Off) X — —
UP SW LEVER (On/Off) X — —
DOWN SW LEVER (On/Off) X — —
SFT UP ST SW (On/Off) — —Not mounted but displayed.
SFT DWN ST SW (On/Off) — —
ABS SIGNAL (On/Off) — — —
ACC OD CUT (On/Off) — —Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system.
ACC SIGNAL (On/Off) — —
TCS GR/P KEEP (On/Off) — — —
TCS SIGNAL 2 (On/Off) — — —
TCS SIGNAL 1 (On/Off) — — —
TCC SOLENOID (A) — X —
LINE PRES SOL (A) — X —
I/C SOLENOID (A) — X —
FR/B SOLENOID (A) — X —
D/C SOLENOID (A) — X —
HLR/C SOL (A) — X —
ON OFF SOL (On/Off) — — LC/B solenoid
TCC SOL MON (A) — — —
L/P SOL MON (A) — — —
Monitored item (Unit)
Monitor Item Selection
RemarksECU IN-PUT SIG-
NALS
MAIN SIG-NALS
SELEC-TION FROM ITEM
TM-41Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
I/C SOL MON (A) — — —
FR/B SOL MON (A) — — —
D/C SOL MON (A) — — —
HLR/C SOL MON (A) — — —
ON OFF SOL MON (On/Off) — — LC/B solenoid
P POSI IND (On/Off) — — —
R POSI IND (On/Off) — — —
N POSI IND (On/Off) — — —
D POSI IND (On/Off) — — —
4TH POSI IND (On/Off) — — —
3RD POSI IND (On/Off) — — —
2ND POSI IND (On/Off) — — —
1ST POSI IND (On/Off) — — —
MANU MODE IND (On/Off) — — —
POWER M LAMP (On/Off) — — Not mounted but displayed.
F-SAFE IND/L (On/Off) — — —
ATF WARN LAMP (On/Off) — — Not mounted but displayed.
BACK-UP LAMP (On/Off) — — —
STARTER RELAY (On/Off) — — —
RANGE SW 3M (On/Off) — — —
C/V CLB ID1 — — —
C/V CLB ID2 — — —
C/V CLB ID3 — — —
UNIT CLB ID1 — — —
UNIT CLB ID2 — — —
UNIT CLB ID3 — — —
TRGT GR RATIO — — —
TRGT PRES TCC (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — —
TRGT PRES L/P (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — —
TRGT PRES I/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — —
TRGT PRE FR/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — —
TRGT PRES D/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — —
TRG PRE HLR/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — —
SHIFT PATTERN — — —
DRV CST JUDGE — — —
Monitored item (Unit)
Monitor Item Selection
RemarksECU IN-PUT SIG-
NALS
MAIN SIG-NALS
SELEC-TION FROM ITEM
TM-42Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
T
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION
Operation Procedure1. Touch “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.2. Touch select item menu.3. Touch “START”.4. Perform driving test according to “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” in “COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
FOR DTC”.- When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to
“TESTING”.5. Stop the vehicle.- If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may exit.6. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance with instructions displayed.7. Touch “YES” or “NO”.8. CONSULT-III procedure is ended.- If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may exit.
Display Item List
START RLY MON — — —
NEXT GR POSI — — —
SHIFT MODE — — —
MANU GR POSI — — —
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h or mph) — X Vehicle speed recognized by the TCM.
1 POSITION SW (On/Off) X —
Not mounted but displayed.OD CONT SW (On/Off) X —
HOLD SW (On/Off) X —
BRAKESW (On/Off) X — Stop lamp switch
POWERSHIFT SW (On/Off) X — Not mounted but displayed.
ASCD-OD CUT (On/Off) — — —
ASCD-CRUISE (On/Off) — — —
DS RANGE (On/Off) X — —
Monitored item (Unit)
Monitor Item Selection
RemarksECU IN-PUT SIG-
NALS
MAIN SIG-NALS
SELEC-TION FROM ITEM
TM-43Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Item name Description Check item
1ST GR FNCTN P0731Following items for “1GR function ratio” can be confirmed.• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake• Hydraulic control cir-
cuit
2ND GR FNCTN P0732Following items for “2GR function ratio” can be confirmed.• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
3RD GR FNCTN P0733Following items for “3GR function ratio” can be confirmed.• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
4TH GR FNCTN P0734Following items for “4GR function ratio” can be confirmed.• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
5TH GR FNCTN P0735Following items for “5GR function ratio” can be confirmed.• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
TM-44Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSISU1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005171693
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and linkswith other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are con-nected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmissionwith less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171694
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURENOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Run engine for at least 6 consecutive seconds at idle speed.3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GSTFollow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”Is “U1000” detected?YES >> Go to TM-45, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171695
Go to LAN-18, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 17th
TCM is not transmitting or receiving CAN com-munication signal for 2 seconds or more.
• Harness or connectors(CAN communication line is open or short-ed.)
• TCM
TM-45Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P0615 STARTER RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
P0615 STARTER RELAY
Description INFOID:0000000005171696
TCM prohibits cranking other than at “P” or “N” position.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171697
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURENOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Shift the selector lever in “P” or “N” position.2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for at least 2 seconds.3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.Is “P0615” detected?YES >> Go to TM-46, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171698
1.CHECK STARTER RELAY SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Check starter relay circuit. Refer to STR-9, "Wiring Diagram - STARTING SYSTEM -".NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and IPDM E/R connector.3. Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and IPDM E/R vehicle
side harness connector terminal.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P0615 STARTER RELAY 14th
If this signal is ON other than in “P” or “N” posi-tion, this is judged to be a malfunction.(And if it is OFF in “P” or “N” position, this too is judged to be a malfunc-tion.
• Harness or connectors(Starter relay and TCM circuit is open or short-ed.)
• Starter relay circuit
IPDM E/R connector
Ground
Condition Voltage (Approx.)Connector Terminal
E5 30
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions.
Battery voltage
Selector lever in other positions.
0 V
TM-46Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P0615 STARTER RELAY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R (PART 2)
Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 1)
Check the following.• Check terminals of A/T assembly connector and IPDM E/R connector for damage.• Check connector for loose connection.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".2. Disconnect TCM connector.3. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector terminal and TCM connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 2)
Check the following.• Check terminals of TCM connector and harness cladding for damage.• Check connector for loose connection.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View"NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connectorContinuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F51 9 E5 30 Existed
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
GroundContinuity
Connector Terminal
F51 9 Not existed
A/T assembly harness connector TCM connectorContinuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F51 9 F151 8 Existed
TM-47Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL
Description INFOID:0000000005171699
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. TheTCM controls the A/T.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171700
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURENOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GSTFollow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.Is “P0700” detected?YES >> Go to TM-48, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171701
1.CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-III1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Touch “Erase”.4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at least 10 seconds.5. Check the DTC again. Refer to TM-48, "DTC Logic"Is “P0700” detected again?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is detect-ed when...
Possible cause
P0700TRANSMISSION CON-
TROL— TCM is malfunctioning. TCM
TM-48Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A
Description INFOID:0000000005171702
The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and transmits a signal to the TCM.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171703
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for least 2 consecutive seconds.
With GSTFollow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.Is “P0705” detected?YES >> Go to TM-49, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171704
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
2.CHECK SUB-HARNESS
1. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".2. Disconnect transmission range switch connector and TCM connector.3. Check continuity between transmission range switch connector terminals and TCM connector terminals.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P0705 T/M RANGE SWITCH A 9th
• Transmission range switch 1 – 4 signals in-put with impossible pattern.
• “P” position is detect-ed from “N” position without any other posi-tion being detected in between.
• Harness or connectors(Transmission range switches 1, 2, 3, 4 and TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
• Transmission range switches 1, 2, 3 and 4
ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8
TM-49Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following.• Check terminals of transmission range switch connector and TCM connector, and harness cladding for dam-
age. • Check connector for loose connection.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Transmission range switch connector TCM connectorContinuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F154
1
F152
13
Existed2 11
3 12
5 14
TM-50Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
Description INFOID:0000000005171705
The input speed sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the A/T. Monitors revolution of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171706
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
With GSTFollow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.Is “P0717” detected?YES >> Go to TM-51, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171707
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P0717INPUT SPEED SEN-
SOR A11th
• TCM does not receive the proper voltage sig-nal from the sensor.
• TCM detects an irreg-ularity only at position of 4GR for input speed sensor 2.
• Harness or connectors(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Input speed sensor 1 and/or 2
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
ACCELE POSI : More than 0.5/8
ENGINE SPEED : 1,500 rpm or more
SLCT LVR POSI : “D” position
GEAR (Input speed sensor 1)
: “4” or “5” position
GEAR (Input speed sensor 2)
: All positions
Driving location : Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving con-ditions required for this test.
TM-51Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
Description INFOID:0000000005171708
The output speed sensor detects the revolution of the parking gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signalis transmitted to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171709
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR AND VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE-A/T” value in response to “VHCL/S SE-MTR”
value.
Are “VHCL/S SE-A/T” and “VHCL/S SE-MTR” values correct?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Go to TM-53, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION 1
With CONSULT-III1. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.2. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
With GSTFollow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P0720OUTPUT SPEED SEN-
SOR1st
• Signal from output speed sensor not input due to cut line or the like.
• Unexpected signal in-put during running.
• After ignition switch is turned ON, unexpect-ed signal input from vehicle speed signal before the vehicle starts moving.
• Harness or connectors(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Output speed sensor• Vehicle speed signal
VHCL/S SE-A/T : Approximately matches the speedometer reading.
VHCL/S SE-MTR : Approximately matches the speedometer reading.
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more
ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8
SLCT LVR POSI : “D” position
Drive location : Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving condi-tions required for this test.
TM-52Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
Is “P0720” detected?YES >> Go to TM-53, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC DETECTION 2
With CONSULT-III1. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.2. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
With GSTFollow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.Is “P0720” detected?YES >> Go to TM-53, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171710
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
2.CHECK SUB-HARNESS
1. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".2. Disconnect transmission range switch connector and TCM connector.3. Check continuity between transmission range switch connector terminals and TCM connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following.• Check terminals of transmission range switch connector and TCM connector, and harness cladding for dam-
age.• Check connector for loose connection.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.REPLACE THE OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR AND CHECK DTC
1. Replace the output speed sensor. Refer to TM-186, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD) or TM-204, "ExplodedView", TM-214, "Disassembly" (AWD).
2. Reinstall any parts removed.3. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to TM-52, "DTC Logic".
ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8
ENGINE SPEED : 3,500 rpm or more
SLCT LVR POSI : “D” position
Drive location : Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving condi-tions required for this test.
Transmission range switch connector TCM connectorContinuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F154
8
F152
20
Existed9 17
10 16
TM-53Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".
TM-54Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P0725 ENGINE SPEED[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
Description INFOID:0000000005171711
The engine speed signal is transmitted from the ECM to the TCM with CAN communication line.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171712
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds.
Is “P0725” detected?YES >> Go to TM-55, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171713
1.CHECK DTC OF ECM
With CONSULT-III1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-533, "DTC Index".
2.CHECK DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT-IIIPerform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.Is any DTC other than “P0725” detected?YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-113, "DTC Index".NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THE IGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P0725 ENGINE SPEED 16thTCM does not receive the CAN communication signal from the ECM.
Harness or connectors(ECM to TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8
SLCT LVR POSI : “D” position
TM-55Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P0725 ENGINE SPEED
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >3. Check for engine speed change corresponding to “ACCELE POSI” while monitoring “ENGINE SPEED”.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Check ignition signal circuit. Refer to EC-474, "Description".
4.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Item name Condition Value
ENGINE SPEED Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading.
ACCELE POSIReleased accelerator pedal. 0.0/8
Fully depressed accelerator pedal 8.0/8
TM-56Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000005171714
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 1GR position as instructed by TCM. This is notonly caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as controlvalve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171715
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST1. Start the engine.2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas, GO TO 2.Is ATF temperature within specified range?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
2.CHECK SYMPTOM 1
With CONSULT-III1. Select “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.2. Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P07311GR INCORRECT RA-
TIO18th
TCM detects any incon-sistency in the actual gear ratio.
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake• Hydraulic control cir-
cuit
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : “1” position
ACCELE POSI : 0.6/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
TM-57Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
4. Keep the current driving status for at least 5 consecutive seconds if CONSULT-III screen changes from“OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.CAUTION:When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”mode for “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0731” is detected, check the DTC. Refer toTM-113, "DTC Index".
With GST1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
2. Check DTC.Is “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0731” detected?YES-1 >> “STOP VEHICLE”: GO TO 3.YES-2 >> “COMPLETED RESULT NG”: Go to TM-58, "Diagnosis Procedure".YES-3 >> “P0731” is detected: Go to TM-58, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
3.CHECK SYMPTOM 2
1. Stop vehicle.2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 5GR and check shift timing and shift shock.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".NO >> Confirm malfunction phenomena by “ROAD TEST” to repair malfunctioning part. Refer to TM-154,
"Description".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171716
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
2.REPLACE CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM
1. Replace control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".2. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to TM-57, "DTC Logic".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Confirm malfunction phenomena by “ROAD TEST” to repair malfunctioning part. Refer to TM-154,
"Description".
ENGINE SPEED : INPUT SPEED – 50 rpm or more
INPUT SPEED : 300 rpm or more
Manual mode switch : ON
Gear position : “1” position
Accelerator opening : 0.6/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
TM-58Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000005171717
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 2GR position as instructed by TCM. This is notonly caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as controlvalve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171718
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST1. Start the engine.2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas, GO TO 2.Is ATF temperature within specified range?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
2.CHECK SYMPTOM 1
With CONSULT-III1. Select “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.2. Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P07322GR INCORRECT RA-
TIO19th
TCM detects any incon-sistency in the actual gear ratio.
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake• Hydraulic control cir-
cuit
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : “2” position
ACCELE POSI : 0.6/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
TM-59Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
4. Keep the current driving status for at least 5 consecutive seconds if CONSULT-III screen changes from“OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.CAUTION:When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”mode for “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0732” is detected, check the DTC. Refer toTM-113, "DTC Index".
With GST1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
2. Check DTC.Is “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0732” detected?YES-1 >> “STOP VEHICLE”: GO TO 3.YES-2 >> “COMPLETED RESULT NG”: Go to TM-60, "Diagnosis Procedure".YES-3 >> “P0732” is detected: Go to TM-60, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
3.CHECK SYMPTOM 2
1. Stop vehicle.2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 5GR and check shift timing and shift shock.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".NO >> Confirm malfunction phenomena by “ROAD TEST” to repair malfunctioning part. Refer to TM-154,
"Description".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171719
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
2.REPLACE CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM
1. Replace control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".2. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to TM-59, "DTC Logic".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Confirm malfunction phenomena by “ROAD TEST” to repair malfunctioning part. Refer to TM-154,
"Description".
ENGINE SPEED : INPUT SPEED − 50 rpm or more
INPUT SPEED : 300 rpm or more
Manual mode switch : ON
Gear position : “2” position
Accelerator opening : 0.6/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
TM-60Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000005171720
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 3GR position as instructed by TCM. This is notonly caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as controlvalve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171721
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST1. Start the engine.2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas, GO TO 2.Is ATF temperature within specified range?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
2.CHECK SYMPTOM 1
With CONSULT-III1. Select “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.2. Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P07333GR INCORRECT RA-
TIO20th
TCM detects any incon-sistency in the actual gear ratio.
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake• Hydraulic control cir-
cuit
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : “3” position
ACCELE POSI : 0.6/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
TM-61Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
4. Keep the current driving status for at least 5 consecutive seconds if CONSULT-III screen changes from“OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.CAUTION:When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”mode for “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0733” is detected, check the DTC. Refer toTM-113, "DTC Index".
With GST1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
2. Check DTC.Is “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0733” detected?YES-1 >> “STOP VEHICLE”: GO TO 3.YES-2 >> “COMPLETED RESULT NG”: Go to TM-62, "Diagnosis Procedure".YES-3 >> “P0733” is detected: Go to TM-62, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
3.CHECK SYMPTOM 2
1. Stop vehicle.2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 5GR and check shift timing and shift shock.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".NO >> Confirm malfunction phenomena by “ROAD TEST” to repair malfunctioning part. Refer to TM-154,
"Description".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171722
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
2.REPLACE CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM
1. Replace control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".2. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to TM-61, "DTC Logic".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Confirm malfunction phenomena by “ROAD TEST” to repair malfunctioning part. Refer to TM-154,
"Description".
ENGINE SPEED : INPUT SPEED − 50 rpm or more
INPUT SPEED : 300 rpm or more
Manual mode switch : ON
Gear position : “3” position
Accelerator opening : 0.6/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
TM-62Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000005171723
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 4GR position as instructed by TCM. This is notonly caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as controlvalve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171724
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST1. Start the engine.2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas, GO TO 2.Is ATF temperature within specified range?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
2.CHECK SYMPTOM 1
With CONSULT-III1. Select “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.2. Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P07344GR INCORRECT RA-
TIO21st
TCM detects any incon-sistency in the actual gear ratio.
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake• Hydraulic control cir-
cuit
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : “4” position
ACCELE POSI : 0.6/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
TM-63Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
4. Keep the current driving status for at least 5 consecutive seconds if CONSULT-III screen changes from“OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.CAUTION:When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”mode for “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0734” is detected, check the DTC. Refer toTM-113, "DTC Index".
With GST1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
2. Check DTC.Is “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0734” detected?YES-1 >> “STOP VEHICLE”: GO TO 3.YES-2 >> “COMPLETED RESULT NG”: Go to TM-64, "Diagnosis Procedure".YES-3 >> “P0734” is detected: Go to TM-64, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
3.CHECK SYMPTOM 2
1. Stop vehicle.2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 5GR and check shift timing and shift shock.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".NO >> Confirm malfunction phenomena by “ROAD TEST” to repair malfunctioning part. Refer to TM-154,
"Description".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171725
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
2.REPLACE CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM
1. Replace control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".2. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to TM-63, "DTC Logic".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Confirm malfunction phenomena by “ROAD TEST” to repair malfunctioning part. Refer to TM-154,
"Description".
ENGINE SPEED : INPUT SPEED − 50 rpm or more
INPUT SPEED : 300 rpm or more
Manual mode switch : ON
Gear position : “4” position
Accelerator opening : 0.6/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
TM-64Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000005171726
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 5GR position as instructed by TCM. This is notonly caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as controlvalve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171727
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST1. Start the engine.2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas, GO TO 2.Is ATF temperature within specified range?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
2.CHECK SYMPTOM 1
With CONSULT-III1. Select “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.2. Select “5TH GR FNCTN P0735”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P07355GR INCORRECT RA-
TIO22nd
TCM detects any incon-sistency in the actual gear ratio.
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake• Hydraulic control cir-
cuit
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : “5” position
ACCELE POSI : 0.6/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
TM-65Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
4. Keep the current driving status for at least 5 consecutive seconds if CONSULT-III screen changes from“OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.CAUTION:When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”mode for “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0735” is detected, check the DTC. Refer toTM-113, "DTC Index".
With GST1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
2. Check DTC.Is “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0735” detected?YES-1 >> “STOP VEHICLE”: GO TO 3.YES-2 >> “COMPLETED RESULT NG”: Go to TM-66, "Diagnosis Procedure".YES-3 >> “P0735” is detected: Go to TM-66, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
3.CHECK SYMPTOM 2
1. Stop vehicle.2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 5GR and check shift timing and shift shock.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".NO >> Confirm malfunction phenomena by “ROAD TEST” to repair malfunctioning part. Refer to TM-154,
"Description".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171728
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
2.REPLACE CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM
1. Replace control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View"2. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to TM-65, "DTC Logic".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION END.NO >> Confirm malfunction phenomena by “ROAD TEST” to repair malfunctioning part. Refer to TM-154,
"Description".
ENGINE SPEED : INPUT SPEED − 50 rpm or more
INPUT SPEED : 300 rpm or more
Manual mode switch : ON
Gear position : “5” position
Accelerator opening : 0.6/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
TM-66Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
Description INFOID:0000000005171729
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D3, D4, D5, M3, M4 and M5 by theTCM in response to signals transmitted from the output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor(throttle position sensor). Torque converter clutch piston operation will then be controlled.
• Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.• When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1.0/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not
change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171730
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
With GSTFollow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.Is “P0740” detected?YES >> Go to TM-67, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171731
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER 3rdNormal voltage not ap-plied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or the like.
• Harness or connectors(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
• Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 80 km/h (50 MPH) or more
ACCELE POSI : 0.5/8 – 1.0/8
SLCT LVR POSI : “D” position
Drive location : Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
TM-67Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER
Description INFOID:0000000005171732
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 5GR position or the torque converter clutch doesnot lock-up as instructed by the TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open orshorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation,etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171733
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine. 2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 30 consecutive seconds.
With GSTFollow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.Is “P0744” detected?YES >> Go to TM-68, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171734
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER 3rd
• A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electri-cal circuit is good.
• TCM detects as irregu-lar by comparing dif-ference value with slip rotation.
• Harness or connectors(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
• Hydraulic control cir-cuit
ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8
SLCT LVR POSI : “D” position
TCC SOLENOID : 0.4 – 0.6 A
VEHICLE SPEED : 80 km/h (50 MPH) or more
Driving location : Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
TM-68Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
Description INFOID:0000000005171735
The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition inresponse to a signal transmitted from the TCM.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171736
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURENOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine and wait for at least 5 seconds.2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GSTFollow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.Is “P0745” detected?YES >> Go to TM-69, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171737
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P0745 PC SOLENOID A 4th
• Normal voltage not ap-plied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or the like.
• TCM detects as irregu-lar by comparing tar-get value with monitor value.
• Harness or connectors(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Line pressure solenoid valve
TM-69Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P1705 TP SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
P1705 TP SENSOR
Description INFOID:0000000005171738
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, accelerator pedal position sensor, throttleposition sensor, etc. The actuator transmits a signal to the ECM, and ECM transmits signals to TCM with CANcommunication.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171739
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURENOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine and let it idle for 1 second.2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.Is “P1705” detected?YES >> Go to TM-70, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171740
1.CHECK DTC OF ECM
With CONSULT-III1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-533, "DTC Index".
2.CHECK DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT-IIIPerform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.Is any DTC other than “P1705” detected?YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-113, "DTC Index".NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P1705 TP SENSOR 15th
TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal position signals (input by CAN communi-cation) from ECM.
Harness or connectors(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
TM-70Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P1710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
P1710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Description INFOID:0000000005171741
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and transmits a signal to the TCM.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171742
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 14 minutes (total). (It is not necessary to
maintain continuously.)
With GSTFollow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.Is “P1710” detected?YES >> Go to TM-71, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171743
1.CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Check “ATF TEMP SE 1” and “ATF TEMP SE 2” values.
Which item is abnormal?
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P1710 FLUID TEMP SENSOR 10th
• While running, the A/T fluid temperature sen-sor signal voltage is excessively high and low.
• A/T fluid temperature does not rise to the specified temperature while driving.
• Harness or connectors(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• A/T fluid temperature sensors 1 and/or 2
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8
SLCT LVR POSI : “D” position
Item name Condition °C (°F) Value (Approx.)
ATF TEMP SE 1 0 (32) – 20 (68) – 80 (176) 3.3 – 2.7 – 0.9 V
ATF TEMP SE 2 0 (32) – 20 (68) – 80 (176) 3.3 – 2.5 – 0.7 V
TM-71Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P1710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >ATF TEMP SE 1>>GO TO 2.ATF TEMP SE 2>>GO TO 5.
2.CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1
1. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".2. Disconnect transmission range switch connector.3. Check A/T fluid temperature sensor 1. Refer to TM-73, "Component Inspection (A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 1)".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".
3.CHECK SUB-HARNESS
1. Disconnect TCM connector.2. Check continuity between transmission range switch connector terminals and TCM connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following.• Check terminals of transmission range switch connector and TCM connector and harness cladding for dam-
age.• Check connector for loose connection.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 8.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2
1. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to TM-174, "Exploded View".2. Check A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to TM-73, "Component Inspection (A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2)".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-174, "Exploded View".
6.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".2. Disconnect TCM connector.3. Check continuity between A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector terminals and TCM connector termi-
nals.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 7.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Transmission range switch connector TCM connectorContinuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F1546
F15219
Existed7 18
A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector TCM connectorContinuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F1561
F1513
Existed2 5
TM-72Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P1710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
Check the following.• Check terminals of A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector and TCM connector, and harness cladding for
damage.• Check connector for loose connection.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 8.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
8.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection (A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 1) INFOID:0000000005171744
1.CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1
Check resistance between transmission range switch connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection (A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2) INFOID:0000000005171745
1.CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2
Check resistance between A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace the A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to TM-174, "Exploded View".
Transmission range switch connectorTemperature °C (°F) Resistance (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F154 6 7
0 (32) 15 kΩ
20 (68) 6.5 kΩ
80 (176) 0.9 kΩ
A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connectorTemperature °C (°F) Resistance (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F156 1 2
0 (32) 10 kΩ
20 (68) 4 kΩ
80 (176) 0.5 kΩ
TM-73Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
Description INFOID:0000000005171746
The vehicle speed signal is transmitted from unified meter and A/C amp. to TCM by CAN communication line.The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the output speed sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM willthen use the vehicle speed signal.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171747
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
Is “P1721” detected?YES >> Go to TM-74, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171748
1.CHECK DTC OF UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.
With CONSULT-IIIPerform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “METER/M&A”.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to MWI-85, "DTC Index".
2.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is detect-ed when...
Possible cause
P1721VEHICLE SPEED SIG-
NAL—
• Signal (CAN commu-nication) from vehicle speed signal not input due to cut line or the like.
• Unexpected signal in-put during running.
Harness or connectors(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
VHCL/S SE-MTR : 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more
ACCELE POSI : 1.0/8 or less
TM-74Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P1730 INTERLOCK[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
P1730 INTERLOCK
Description INFOID:0000000005171749
Fail-safe function to detect interlock conditions.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171750
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2GR, a input speed sensor malfunction is displayed, but this is nota input speed sensor malfunction.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURENOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
With GSTFollow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.Is “P1730” detected?YES >> Go to TM-75, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Judgment of Interlock INFOID:0000000005171751
Refer to TM-111, "Fail-Safe".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171752
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P1730 INTERLOCK 12th
Except during shift change, the gear posi-tion and ATF pressure switch states are moni-tored and comparative judgment made.
• Harness or connectors(Solenoid and switch circuit is open or short-ed.)
• Low coast brake sole-noid valve
• ATF pressure switch 2
SLCT LVR POSI : “D” position
TM-75Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P1731 1ST ENGINE BRAKING
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
P1731 1ST ENGINE BRAKING
Description INFOID:0000000005171753
Fail-safe function to prevent sudden decrease in speed by engine brake other than at M1 position.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171754
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURENOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
Is “P1731” detected?YES >> Go to TM-76, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171755
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P1731 1ST E/BRAKING 13th
ATF pressure switch 2 and solenoid current is monitor and if a pattern is detected having engine braking 1GR other than in the M1 position, a mal-function is detected.
• Harness or connectors(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Low coast brake sole-noid valve
• ATF pressure switch 2
ENGINE SPEED : 1,200 rpm
GEAR : “1” position
MANU MODE SW : ON
TM-76Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID
Description INFOID:0000000005171756
• The Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the trans-mission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor).Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position.
• The Input clutch solenoid valve controls the input clutch control valve in response to a signal transmittedfrom the TCM.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171757
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
With GSTFollow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.Is “P1752” detected?YES >> Go to TM-77, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171758
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P1752INPUT CLUTCH SOLE-
NOID5th
• Normal voltage not ap-plied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or the like.
• TCM detects as irregu-lar by comparing tar-get value with monitor value.
• Harness or connectors(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
• Input clutch solenoid valve
ACCELE POSI : 1.5/8 – 2.0/8
GEAR : “3”⇒“4” (I/C ON/OFF)
SLCT LVR POSI : “D” position
Driving location : Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving con-ditions required for this test.
TM-77Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID
Description INFOID:0000000005171759
• The front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmis-sion range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor).Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position.
• The front brake solenoid valve controls the front brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted fromthe TCM.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171760
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
With GSTFollow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.Is “P1757” detected?YES >> Go to TM-78, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171761
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P1757 FR BRAKE SOLENOID 6th
• Normal voltage not ap-plied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or the like.
• TCM detects as irregu-lar by comparing tar-get value with monitor value.
• Harness or connectors(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
• Front brake solenoid valve
ACCELE POSI : 1.5/8 – 2.0/8
GEAR : “3”⇒“4” (FR/B ON/OFF)
SLCT LVR POSI : “D” position
Drive location : Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving condi-tions required for this test.
TM-78Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID
Description INFOID:0000000005171762
• The direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the trans-mission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor).Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position.
• The direct clutch solenoid valve controls the direct clutch control valve in response to a signal transmittedfrom the TCM.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171763
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
With GSTFollow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.Is “P1762” detected?YES >> Go to TM-79, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171764
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P1762DRCT CLUTCH SOLE-
NOID2nd
• Normal voltage not ap-plied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or the like.
• TCM detects as irregu-lar by comparing tar-get value with monitor value.
• Harness or connectors(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
ACCELE POSI : 1.5/8 – 2.0/8
GEAR : “1”⇒“2” (D/C ON/OFF)
SLCT LVR POSI : “D” position
Driving location : Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving con-ditions required for this test.
TM-79Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID
Description INFOID:0000000005171765
• The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmittedfrom the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttleposition sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position.
• The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve controls the high and low reverse clutch control valve inresponse to a signal transmitted from the TCM.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171766
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
With GSTFollow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.Is “P1767” detected?YES >> Go to TM-80, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171767
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P1767HLR CLUTCH SOLE-
NOID8th
• Normal voltage not ap-plied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or the like.
• TCM detects as irregu-lar by comparing tar-get value with monitor value.
• Harness or connectors(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
ACCELE POSI : 1.5/8 – 2.0/8
GEAR : “2”⇒“3” (HLR/C ON/OFF)
SLCT LVR POSI : “D” position
Driving location : Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
TM-80Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID
Description INFOID:0000000005171768
• The low coast brake solenoid valve is turned ON or OFF by the TCM in response to signals transmitted fromthe transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle positionsensor). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position.
• The low coast brake solenoid valve controls the low coast brake switching valve in response to a signaltransmitted from the TCM.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171769
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
With GSTFollow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.Is “P1772” detected?YES >> Go to TM-81, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171770
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P1772 L C BRAKE SOLENOID 7thNormal voltage not ap-plied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or the like.
• Harness or connectors(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
• Low coast brake sole-noid valve
GEAR : “1” or “2” (LC/B ON/OFF)
MANU MODE SW : ON
TM-81Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID
Description INFOID:0000000005171771
• Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned ON or OFF by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from thetransmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sen-sor). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position.
• This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunc-tion such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171772
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions.
4. Stop vehicle and perform step 3 again.5. Stop vehicle.6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step 1 to 4 again.
With GSTFollow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.Is “P1774” detected?YES >> Go to TM-82, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171773
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is de-tected when...
Possible cause
P1774 L C BRAKE SOLENOID 7th
• TCM detects an im-proper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
• Condition of ATF pres-sure switch 2 is differ-ent from monitor value, and relation be-tween gear position and actual gear ratio is irregular.
• Harness or connectors(Solenoid and switch circuit is open or short-ed.)
• Low coast brake sole-noid valve
• ATF pressure switch 2
GEAR : “1” or “2” (LC/B ON/OFF)
MANU MODE SW : ON
TM-82Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
TM-83Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
Description INFOID:0000000005171774
Manual mode switch (mode select switch and position select switch) is installed in A/T shift selector assembly.It transmits manual mode switch, shift up and shift down switch signals to unified meter and A/C amp. Thenunified meter and A/C amp. transmits signals to TCM with CAN communication.TCM transmits the switch signals to unified meter and A/C amp. by CAN communication line. Then manualmode switch position is indicated on the A/T indicator. For inspection, refer to TM-90.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005171775
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.NOTE:If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switchOFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
Is “P1815” detected?YES >> Go to TM-84, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-37, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171776
1.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals.
DTCItem
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
A/T CHECK indicator lamp judgment flicker
Diagnostic item is detect-ed when...
Possible cause
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH —
TCM monitors manual mode, non manual mode, up or down switch signal, and detects as ir-regular when impossible input pattern occurs 2 second or more.
• Harness or connectors(These switches circuit is open or shorted.)
• Manual mode select switch (Into A/T shift selector)
• Manual mode position select switch (Into A/T shift selector)
MANU MODE SW : ON
TM-84Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
TIs the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> GO TO 4.
2.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Check manual mode switch. Refer to TM-86, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following.• Check terminals of A/T shift selector harness connector and harness cladding for damage.• Check connector for loose connection.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 8.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect unified meter and A/C amp. connector.3. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and unified meter
and A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 2)
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Voltage (Approx.)Connector
Terminal
+ –
M137
1
4 Battery voltage2
3
5
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
GroundContinuity
Connector Terminal
M137 4 Existed
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connectorUnified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness
connector Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137
1
M66
10
Existed2 25
3 5
5 11
TM-85Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 7.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following.• Check terminals of unified meter and A/C amp. connector for damage.• Check connector for loose connection.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 8.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
8.CHECK UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.
1. Reconnect all the connectors.2. Turn ignition switch ON.3. Select “M RANGE SW”, “NM RANGE SW”, “AT SFT UP SW” and “AT SFT DWN SW” in “Data Monitor” in
“METER/M&A”, and check the On/Off operations of each monitor item. Refer to MWI-71, "ReferenceValue".
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 9.NO >> Replace unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-131, "Exploded View".
9.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) INFOID:0000000005171777
1.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Check continuity between terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION END
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Ground
ContinuityConnector Terminal
M137
1
Not existed2
3
5
A/T shift selector harness connectorCondition Continuity
Connector Terminal
M137
1
4
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side Existed
Other than the above Not existed
2Selector lever is shifted to − side Existed
Other than the above Not existed
3Selector lever is shifted to + side Existed
Other than the above Not existed
5Selector lever is shifted to “D” position Existed
Other than the above Not existed
TM-86Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-160, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD), TM-163,"AWD : Exploded View" (AWD).
TM-87Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005171778
Supply power to TCM.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171779
1.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector.3. Check voltage between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Check the following. If NG, repair or replace damaged parts.
• Harness for short or open between battery and A/T assembly vehicle side harness connectorterminals 1, 2.
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and A/T assembly vehicle side harness con-nector terminal 6.
• 10A fuse (No. 36, located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box). Refer to PG-126, "Fuse andFusible Link Arrangement".
• 10A fuse (No. 43, located in the IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-127, "Fuse, Connector and TerminalArrangement".
• Push-button ignition switch. Refer to PG-69, "Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
2.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 1)
Check the following.• Check terminals of A/T assembly connector for damage.• Check connector for loose connection.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".2. Disconnect TCM connector.3. Check continuity between A/T assembly connector terminals and TCM connector terminals.
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Condition Voltage (Approx.)Connector Terminal
F51
1Always
Battery voltage2
6Turn ignition switch ON
Turn ignition switch OFF 0 V
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
Ground
ContinuityConnector Terminal
F515
Existed10
TM-88Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
TIs the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 2)
Check the following.• Check terminals of TCM connector and harness cladding for damage.• Check connector for loose connection.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T assembly connector TCM connectorContinuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F51
1
F151
9
Existed
2 10
6 4
5F153
21
10 22
TM-89Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005171780
TCM transmit the switch signals to unified meter and A/C amp. by CAN communication line. Then manualmode switch position is indicated on the shift position indicator.
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000005171781
1.CHECK A/T INDICATOR
1. Start the engine.2. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “DS”) and the indication of the shift position
indicator mutually coincide.3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual gear position and the meter's indication of
the position mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (− side)”side (1GR ⇔ 5GR).
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Go to TM-90, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171782
1.CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-III1. Start the engine.2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION” and read out the value.3. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “DS”) and the indication of the shift position
indicator mutually coincide. Refer to TM-102, "Reference Value".4. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual gear position and the meter's indication of
the position mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (− side)”side (1GR ⇔ 5GR).
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO-1 >> The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the manual mode is not possible (no
gear shifting in the manual mode possible). Or the shift position indicator is not indicated.• Check manual mode switch. Refer to TM-86, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)".• Check A/T main system (Fail-safe function actuated). - Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-113, "DTC Index".
NO-2 >> The actual gear position changes, but the shift position indicator is not indicated.• Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-113, "DTC Index".
NO-3 >> The actual gear position and the indication on the shift position indicator do not coincide.• Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-113, "DTC Index".
NO-4 >> Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the shift position indicator.• Replace the unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-131, "Exploded View".
TM-90Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Description INFOID:0000000005171783
Refer to TM-33, "System Description".
Wiring Diagram - A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000005171784
JCDWA0543GB
TM-91Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
JCDWA0544GB
TM-92Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000005171785
1.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal released.Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
JCDWA0545GB
TM-93Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >YES >> Go to TM-94, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 2)
Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal depressed.Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Go to TM-94, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171786
1.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION
Check the selector lever position for damage. Refer to TM-158, "2WD : Inspection and Adjustment" (2WD),TM-158, "AWD : Inspection and Adjustment" (AWD).Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to TM-158, "2WD : Inspection and Adjustment" (2WD), TM-158,
"AWD : Inspection and Adjustment" (AWD).
2.CHECK POWER SOURCE
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.2. Turn ignition switch ON.3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Check the following. If NG, repair or replace damaged parts.
• 10A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-125, "Fuse, Connector and Termi-nal Arrangement".
• Harness for short to ground or open between battery and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-6, "Wir-ing Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -".
• Harness for short to ground or open between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connectorterminal 4F and stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal 3.
3.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-95, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND A/T SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 1)
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Condition Voltage (Approx.)Connector Terminal
E110 3Depressed brake pedal Battery voltage
Released brake pedal 0 V
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
GroundContinuity
Connector Terminal
M137 4 Existed
TM-94Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T shift selectorvehicle side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND A/T SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 2)
Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 7.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7.CHECK SHIFT LOCK UNIT
1. Remove shift lock unit. Refer to TM-160, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD), TM-163, "AWD : Exploded View"(AWD).
2. Check shift lock solenoid. Refer to TM-95, "Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid)".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Check the following.
• Harness for short to ground or open between A/T shift selector connector terminal 8 and shiftlock solenoid A/T shift selector side harness connector terminal 3.
• Harness for open between A/T shift selector connector terminal 4 and shift lock solenoid A/Tshift selector side harness connector terminal 4.
NO >> Replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) INFOID:0000000005171787
1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
Apply voltage to terminals 3 and 4 of shift lock unit connector, and then check that shift lock solenoid is acti-vated.CAUTION:Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.
Can the lock plate be moved up and down?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-160, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD), TM-163, "AWD :
Exploded View" (AWD).
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000005171788
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals.
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connectorContinuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E110 4 M137 8 Existed
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
GroundContinuity
Connector Terminal
E110 4 Not existed
Shift lock unit connector
Condition StatusConnector
Terminal
+ (fuse) −
M222 3 4Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 3 and 4.
Shift lock solenoid oper-ates
TM-95Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-160, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD), TM-163, "AWD :
Exploded View" (AWD).
Stop lamp switch connectorCondition Continuity
Connector Terminal
E110 3 4Depressed brake pedal. Existed
Released brake pedal. Not existed
TM-96Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
Description INFOID:0000000005171789
Indicates selector lever position.
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000005171790
1.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (STEP 1)
1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check that each position indicator lamp of the selector lever position indicator turns on when shifting the
selector lever from “P” to “M” position. Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Go to TM-97, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (STEP 2)
Check that the night illumination of the selector lever position indicator turns on when setting the lightingswitch in 1st position.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Go to TM-97, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005171791
1.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Which item is abnormal?Position indicator lamp>> GO TO 2.Illumination lamp>> GO TO 11.
2.CHECK POWER SOURCE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 7.NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Voltage (Approx.)Connector
Terminal
+ –
M137 10 4 Battery voltage
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
GroundContinuity
Connector Terminal
M137 4 Existed
TM-97Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND BCM (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector.3. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and BCM vehicle
side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND BCM (PART 2)
Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6.CHECK MALFUNCTION ITEM
Check the following.• Check terminals and harness of BCM harness connector and A/T shift selector harness connector for dam-
age.• Check connector for loose connection.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Check BCM input/output signal. Refer to BCS-46, "Reference Value".NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7.CHECK SHIFT POSITION SWITCH
1. Disconnect shift position switch connector.2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminals and shift position switch connec-
tor terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector BCM vehicle side harness connectorContinuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137 10 M122 96 Existed
A/T shift selector harness connector
GroundContinuity
Connector Terminal
M137 10 Not existed
A/T shift selector harness connector Shift position switch connectorCondition Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137
4
M221
7 Selector lever in “D” position.
Existed
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11 No existed
9 Selector lever in “M” position.
Existed
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11 No existed
10
2, 6 Selector lever in “N” and “M” position.
Existed
3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed
3, 6 Selector lever in “D” position.
Existed
2, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed
4, 6 Selector lever in “R” position.
Existed
2, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed
5, 6 Selector lever in “P” position.
Existed
2, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed
TM-98Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
YES >> GO TO 8.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-160, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD), TM-163,
"AWD : Exploded View" (AWD).
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICA-TOR (PART 1)
1. Disconnect selector lever position indicator connector.2. Check continuity between shift position switch harness connector terminals and selector lever position
indicator connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 9.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-160, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD), TM-163,
"AWD : Exploded View" (AWD).
9.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICA-TOR (PART 2)
Check harness cladding between shift position switch connector and selector lever position indicator connec-tor for damage.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 10.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-160, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD), TM-163,
"AWD : Exploded View" (AWD).
10.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
Check selector lever position indicator. Refer to TM-100, "Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Check the following.
• Check terminals of A/T shift selector connector, shift position switch connector and selectorlever position indicator connector for damage.
• Check connector for loose connection.NO >> Replace damaged parts.
11.CHECK POWER SOURCE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 12.NO >> Check illumination circuit. Refer to INL-41, "Wiring Diagram - ILLUMINATION -".
Shift position switch harness connector Selector lever position indicator harness connectorContinuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M221
2
M223
3
Existed
3 4
4 5
5 7
6 6
7 8
9 2
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Condition Voltage (Approx.)Connector
Terminal
+ –
M137 7 9 Lighting switch 1ST Battery voltage
TM-99Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
12.CHECK SHIFT POSITION SWITCH
1. Disconnect shift position switch connector.2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminals and shift position switch connec-
tor terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 13.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-160, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD), TM-163,
"AWD : Exploded View" (AWD).
13.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDI-CATOR (PART 1)
1. Disconnect selector lever position indicator connector.2. Check continuity between shift position switch harness connector terminals and selector lever position
indicator connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 14.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-160, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD), TM-163,
"AWD : Exploded View" (AWD).
14.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDI-CATOR (PART 2)
Check harness cladding between shift position switch connector and selector lever position indicator connec-tor for damage.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 10.NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-160, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD), TM-163,
"AWD : Exploded View" (AWD).
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000005171792
1.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
Check that selector lever position indicator lamps turn on.CAUTION:Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.
A/T shift selector harness connector Shift position switch connectorContinuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137
7
M221
10 Existed
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 11 No existed
911 Existed
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10 No existed
Shift position switch harness connector Selector lever position indicator harness connectorContinuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M22110
M2231
Existed11 9
TM-100Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
T
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace the selector lever position indicator. Refer to TM-160, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD),
TM-163, "AWD : Exploded View" (AWD).
Selector lever position indicator connector
Condition StatusConnector
Terminal
+ (fuse) –
M223
3
8
Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 3 and 8.
“N” position indicator lamp turns on.
4Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 4 and 8.
“D” position indicator lamp turns on.
5Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 5 and 8.
“R” position indicator lamp turns on.
7Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 7 and 8.
“P” position indicator lamp turns on.
6 2Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 6 and 2.
“M” mode indicator lamp turns on.
1 9Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 1 and 9.
Illumination lamp turns on.
TM-101Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATIONTCM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000005171793
VALUES ON DIAGNOSIS TOOLNOTE:1. The CONSULT-III electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each
solenoid).Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-III display. If the difference isnoticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanicalparts using applicable diagnostic procedures.
2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-III and that indicated in Service Man-ual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
- Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance- Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start- Gear position displayed on CONSULT-III indicates the point where shifts are completed3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-III changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed
upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM
Item name Condition Value / Status (Ap-
prox.)
VHCL/S SE-A/T During drivingApproximately
matches the speed-ometer reading.
VHCL/S SE-MTR During drivingApproximately
matches the speed-ometer reading.
ACCELE POSIReleased accelerator pedal. 0.0/8
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8.0/8
CLSD THL POSReleased accelerator pedal. On
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. Off
W/O THL POSFully depressed accelerator pedal. On
Released accelerator pedal. Off
BRAKE SWDepressed brake pedal. On
Released brake pedal. Off
GEAR During driving 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
ENGINE SPEED Engine runningClosely matches the tachometer reading.
INPUT SPEED During driving (lock-up ON)Approximately
matches the engine speed.
ATF TEMP SE 1 0°C (32° F) – 20°C (68°F) – 80°C (176°F) 3.3 – 2.7 – 0.9 V
ATF TEMP SE 2 0°C (32° F) – 20°C (68°F) – 80°C (176°F) 3.3 – 2.5 – 0.7 V
ATF TEMP 1 Ignition switch ONTemperature of ATF in the oil pan is indi-
cated.
ATF PRES SW 2Low coast brake engaged. Refer to TM-21. On
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to TM-21. Off
TM-102Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TCM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
T
TERMINAL LAYOUT
SLCT LVR POSI
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions N/P
Selector lever in “R” position R
Selector lever in “D” position D
Selector lever in “M” position: 5GR D
Selector lever in “M” position: 4GR 4
Selector lever in “M” position: 3GR 3
Selector lever in “M” position: 2GR 2
Selector lever in “M” position: 1GR 1
MANU MODE SWSelector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side On
Other than the above Off
NON M-MODE SWSelector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side Off
Other than the above On
UP SW LEVERSelector lever is shifted to + side On
Other than the above Off
DOWN SW LEVERSelector lever is shifted to − side On
Other than the above Off
TCC SOLENOID
Slip lock-up is active 0.2 – 0.4 A
Lock-up is active 0.4 – 0.6 A
Other than the above 0 – 0.05 A
LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 – 0.6 A
FR/B SOLENOIDFront brake engaged. Refer to TM-21. 0.6 – 0.8 A
Front brake disengaged. Refer to TM-21. 0 – 0.05 A
I/C SOLENOIDInput clutch disengaged. Refer to TM-21. 0.6 – 0.8 A
Input clutch engaged. Refer to TM-21. 0 – 0.05 A
D/C SOLENOIDDirect clutch disengaged. Refer to TM-21. 0.6 – 0.8 A
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to TM-21. 0 – 0.05 A
HLR/C SOLHigh and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to TM-21. 0.6 – 0.8 A
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to TM-21. 0 – 0.05 A
ON OFF SOLLow coast brake engaged. Refer to TM-21. On
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to TM-21. Off
STARTER RELAYSelector lever in “N” and “P” positions. On
Selector lever in “R” and “D” positions. Off
VEHICLE SPEED During drivingApproximately
matches the speed-ometer reading.
Item name Condition Value / Status (Ap-
prox.)
SCIA1658E
TM-103Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal(Wire color)
Description
Condition Value (Approx.)
+ − Signal nameInput/Output
1(BR)
GroundPower supply(Memory back-up)
Input Always Battery voltage
2(BR)
GroundPower supply(Memory back-up)
Input Always Battery voltage
3(L)
— CAN-HInput/Output
— —
4(V)
—K-line (CONSULT-III signal)
Input/Output
— —
5(B)
Ground Ground Output Always 0 V
6(Y)
Ground Power supply InputIgnition switch ON Battery voltage
Ignition switch OFF 0 V
7(R)
Ground Back-up lamp relay Input Ignition switch ONSelector lever in “R” position. 0 V
Selector lever in other positions. Battery voltage
8(P)
— CAN-LInput/Output
— —
9(GR)
Ground Starter relay Output Ignition switch ON
Selector lever in “N” and “P” po-sitions.
Battery voltage
Selector lever in other positions. 0 V
10(B)
Ground Ground Output Always 0 V
TM-104Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TCM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
T
Wiring Diagram - A/T CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000005171794
JCDWA0536GB
TM-105Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
JCDWA0537GB
TM-106Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TCM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
T
JCDWA0538GB
TM-107Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
JCDWA0539GB
TM-108Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TCM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
T
JCDWA0540GB
TM-109Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
JCDWA0541GB
TM-110Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TCM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
T
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000005171795
The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. This mode makes it possible to operate even if there is an error in amain electronic control input/output signal circuit. In fail-safe mode, even if the selector lever is in “D” or “M” mode, the A/T is fixed in 2GR, 4GR and 5GR(depending on the breakdown position), so the customer should feel “slipping” or “poor acceleration”.Even when the electronic circuits are normal, under special conditions (for example, when slamming on thebrake with the wheels spinning markedly and stopping the tire rotation), the A/T can go into fail-safe mode. If
JCDWA0542GB
TM-111Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >this happens, switch OFF the ignition switch for 10 seconds. Then switch it ON again to return to the normalshift pattern. When the customer's vehicle has returned to normal, handle according to the “Work Flow” (Referto TM-5, "Work Flow").
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTIONIf any malfunction occurs in a sensor or solenoid, this function controls the A/T to make driving possible.
Output Speed SensorSignals are input from two systems - from output speed sensor installed on the A/T and from unified meter andA/C amp. so normal driving is possible even if there is a malfunction in one of the systems. If output speedsensor has unusual cases, 5GR and manual mode are prohibited.
Accelerator Pedal Position SensorIf there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM accordingto a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. If there are malfunctions in tow systems, theengine speed is fixed by ECM to a pre-determined engine speed to make driving possible.
Throttle Position SensorIf there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM accordingto a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. If there are malfunctions in tow systems, theaccelerator opening angle is controlled by the idle signal transmitted from the ECM which is based on inputindicating either idle condition or off-idle condition (pre-determined accelerator opening) in order to make driv-ing possible.
Transmission Range SwitchIn the unlikely event that a malfunction signal enters the TCM, the position indicator is switched OFF, thestarter relay is switched OFF (starter is disabled), the back-up lamp relay switched OFF (back-up lamp is OFF)and the position is fixed to the “D” position to make driving possible.
Starter RelayThe starter relay is switched OFF. (Starter is disabled.)
Interlock• If there is an interlock judgment malfunction, the A/T is fixed in 2GR to make driving possible.
NOTE:When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2GR, a input speed sensor malfunction is displayed, but this isnot a input speed sensor malfunction.
• When interlock is detected at the 3GR or more, it is locked at the 2GR.
1st Engine BrakingWhen there is an A/T 1st engine brake judgment malfunction, the low coast brake solenoid is switched OFF toavoid the engine brake operation.
Line Pressure SolenoidThe solenoid is switched OFF and the line pressure is set to the maximum hydraulic pressure to make drivingpossible.
Torque Converter Clutch SolenoidThe solenoid is switched OFF to release the lock-up.
Low Coast Brake SolenoidWhen a malfunction (electrical or functional) occurs, in order to make driving possible. If the solenoid is ON,the A/T is held in 2GR. If the solenoid is OFF, the A/T is held in 4GR. (Engine brake is not applied in 1GR and2GR.)
Input Clutch SolenoidIf a malfunction (electrical or functional) occurs with the solenoid either ON or OFF, the A/T is held in 4GR tomake driving possible.
Direct Clutch SolenoidIf a malfunction (electrical or functional) occurs with the solenoid either ON or OFF, the A/T is held in 4GR tomake driving possible.
Front Brake SolenoidIf a malfunction (electrical or functional) occurs with the solenoid ON, in order to make driving possible. The A/T is held in 5GR. If the solenoid is OFF, the A/T is in 4GR.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid
TM-112Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TCM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
T
If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid either ON or OFF, the A/T is held in 4GR tomake driving possible.
Input Speed Sensor 1 or 2The control is the same as if there were no input speed sensors, 5GR and manual mode are prohibited.
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000005171796
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following prioritychart.NOTE:If DTC “U1000” is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for “DTC U1000 CANCOMM CIRCUIT”. Refer to TM-45, "Description".
DTC Index INFOID:0000000005171797
NOTE:If DTC “U1000” is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for “DTC U1000 CANCOMM CIRCUIT”. Refer to TM-45, "Description".
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
2 Except above
DTC*2
Items(CONSULT-III screen terms)
ReferenceMIL*1, “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III or GST
CONSULT-III only “TRANSMIS-
SION”
— P0615 STARTER RELAY TM-46
P0700 P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL TM-48
P0705 P0705 T/M RANGE SWITCH A TM-49
P0710 P1710 FLUID TEMP SENSOR TM-71
P0717 P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A TM-51
P0720 P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR TM-52
— P0725 ENGINE SPEED TM-55
P0731 P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-57
P0732 P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-59
P0733 P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-61
P0734 P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-63
P0735 P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-65
P0740 P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-67
P0744 P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-68
P0745 P0745 PC SOLENOID A TM-69
— P1705 TP SENSOR TM-70
— P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL TM-74
P1730 P1730 INTERLOCK TM-75
— P1731 1ST E/BRAKING TM-76
P1752 P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID TM-77
P1757 P1757 FR BRAKE SOLENOID TM-78
P1762 P1762 DRCT CLUTCH SOLENOID TM-79
P1767 P1767 HLR CLUTCH SOLENOID TM-80
P1772 P1772 L C BRAKE SOLENOID TM-81
TM-113Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
*1: Refer to TM-35, "Diagnosis Description".
*2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
P1774 P1774 L C BRAKE SOLENOID TM-82
— P1815 M-MODE SWITCH TM-84
U1000 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT TM-45
DTC*2
Items(CONSULT-III screen terms)
ReferenceMIL*1, “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III or GST
CONSULT-III only “TRANSMIS-
SION”
TM-114Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SYSTEM SYMPTOM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
T
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSISSYSTEM SYMPTOM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000005171798
The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from item 1.
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
1
Shift Shock
Large shock. (“N”→“D” position)
ON vehicle
1. Engine idle speed EC-17
2. Engine speed signal TM-55
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
4. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
5. A/T fluid temperature sensor TM-71
6. Front brake solenoid valve TM-78
7. CAN communication line TM-45
8. A/T fluid leakage —
9. Line pressure test TM-152
10. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle11. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".
TM-214
2Shock is too large when changing D1→ D2 or M1 → M2.
ON vehicle
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
2. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
3. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-79
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Engine speed signal TM-55
6. Input speed sensor TM-51
7. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
8. A/T fluid leakage —
9. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle 10. Direct clutch TM-273
TM-115Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
3
Shift Shock
Shock is too large when changing D2→ D3 or M2 → M3.
ON vehicle
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
2. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
3. High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-80
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Engine speed signal TM-55
6. Input speed sensor TM-51
7. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
8. A/T fluid leakage —
9. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle 10. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
4Shock is too large when changing D3→ D4 or M3 → M4.
ON vehicle
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
2. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
3. Input clutch solenoid valve TM-77
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Engine speed signal TM-55
6. Input speed sensor TM-51
7. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
8. A/T fluid leakage —
9. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle 10. Input clutch TM-261
5Shock is too large when changing D4→ D5 orM4 → M5.
ON vehicle
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
2. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
3. Front brake solenoid valve TM-78
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Engine speed signal TM-55
6. Input speed sensor TM-51
7. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
8. A/T fluid leakage —
9. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle10. Front brake (brake band) TM-204
11. Input clutch TM-261
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-116Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SYSTEM SYMPTOM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
T6
Shift Shock
Shock is too large for downshift when accel-erator pedal is de-pressed.
ON vehicle
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
2. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
3. CAN communication line TM-45
4. Engine speed signal TM-55
5. Input speed sensor TM-51
6. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
7. A/T fluid leakage —
8. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
9. Front brake (brake band) TM-204
10. Input clutch TM-261
11. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
12. Direct clutch TM-273
7Shock is too large for upshift when accelera-tor pedal is released.
ON vehicle
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
2. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
3. Engine speed signal TM-55
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Input speed sensor TM-51
6. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
7. A/T fluid leakage —
8. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
9. Front brake (brake band) TM-204
10. Input clutch TM-261
11. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
12. Direct clutch TM-273
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-117Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
8
Shift Shock
Shock is too large for lock-up.
ON vehicle
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
2. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
3. Engine speed signal TM-55
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Input speed sensor TM-51
6. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-67
8. A/T fluid leakage —
9. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle 10. Torque converter TM-255
9Shock is too large dur-ing engine brake.
ON vehicle
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
2. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
3. CAN communication line TM-45
4. A/T fluid leakage —
5. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
6. Front brake (brake band) TM-204
7. Input clutch TM-261
8. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
9. Direct clutch TM-273
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-118Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SYSTEM SYMPTOM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
T
10
No Up Shift
Gear does not change from D1 → D2 or from M1 → M2.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-79
4. Line pressure test TM-152
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle 7. Direct clutch TM-273
11Gear does not change from D2 → D3 or from M2 → M3.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-80
4. Line pressure test TM-152
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle 7. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
12Gear does not change from D3 → D4 or from M3 → M4.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. Input clutch solenoid valve TM-77
4. Front brake solenoid valve TM-78
5. Line pressure test TM-152
6. CAN communication line TM-45
7. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle 8. Input clutch TM-261
13Gear does not change from D4 → D5 or from M4 → M5.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. Front brake solenoid valve TM-78
4. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-79
5. Input speed sensor TM-51
6. Line pressure test TM-152
7. CAN communication line TM-45
8. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle9. Front brake (brake band) TM-204
10. Input clutch TM-261
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-119Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
14
No Down Shift
In “D” or “M” position, does not downshift to 4GR.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. Front brake solenoid valve TM-78
4. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-79
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Line pressure test TM-152
7. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle8. Front brake (brake band) TM-204
9. Input clutch TM-261
15In “D” or “M” position, does not downshift to 3GR.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. Input clutch solenoid valve TM-77
4. Front brake solenoid valve TM-78
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Line pressure test TM-152
7. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle 8. Input clutch TM-261
16In “D” or “M” position, does not downshift to 2GR.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-80
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Line pressure test TM-152
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle 7. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
17In “D” or “M” position, does not downshift to 1GR.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-79
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Line pressure test TM-152
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle 7. Direct clutch TM-273
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-120Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SYSTEM SYMPTOM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
T18
Slips/Will Not En-gage
When “D” or “M” posi-tion, remains in 1GR.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-79
4. Line pressure test TM-152
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
7. 3rd one-way clutch TM-259
8. 1st one-way clutch TM-266
9. Gear system TM-204
10. Reverse brake TM-214
11. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
19When “D” or “M” posi-tion, remains in 2GR.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. Low coast brake solenoid valve TM-81
4. Line pressure test TM-152
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
7. 3rd one-way clutch TM-259
8. Gear system TM-204
9. Direct clutch TM-273
10. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-121Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
20
Slips/Will Not En-gage
When “D” or “M” posi-tion, remains in 3GR.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. Line pressure test TM-152
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
6. 3rd one-way clutch TM-259
7. Gear system TM-204
8. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
9. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
10. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
21When “D” or “M” posi-tion, remains in 4GR.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. Input clutch solenoid valve TM-77
4. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-79
5. High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-80
6. Low coast brake solenoid valve TM-81
7. Front brake solenoid valve TM-78
8. Line pressure test TM-152
9. CAN communication line TM-45
10. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
11. Input clutch TM-261
12. Gear system TM-204
13. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
14. Direct clutch TM-273
22When “D” or “M” posi-tion, remains in 5GR.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. Front brake solenoid valve TM-78
4. Line pressure test TM-152
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
7. Front brake (brake band) TM-204
8. Input clutch TM-261
9. Gear system TM-204
10. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-122Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SYSTEM SYMPTOM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
T23
Slips/Will Not En-gage
Vehicle cannot take off from D1.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
3. Line pressure test TM-152
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
6. Torque converter TM-255
7. Oil pump assembly TM-256
8. 3rd one-way clutch TM-259
9. 1st one-way clutch TM-266
10. Gear system TM-204
11. Reverse brake TM-214
12. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
24 Does not lock-up.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Line pressure test TM-152
3. Engine speed signal TM-55
4. Input speed sensor TM-51
5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-67
6. CAN communication line TM-45
7. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle8. Torque converter TM-255
9. Oil pump assembly TM-256
25Does not hold lock-up condition.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Line pressure test TM-152
3. Engine speed signal TM-55
4. Input speed sensor TM-51
5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-255
6. CAN communication line TM-45
7. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle8. Torque converter TM-255
9. Oil pump assembly TM-256
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-123Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
26
Slips/Will Not En-gage
Lock-up is not re-leased.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Line pressure test TM-152
3. Engine speed signal TM-55
4. Input speed sensor TM-51
5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-67
6. CAN communication line TM-45
7. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle8. Torque converter TM-255
9. Oil pump assembly TM-256
27
No shock at all or the clutch slips when vehi-cle changes speed D1
→ D2 or M1 → M2.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-79
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Line pressure test TM-152
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
7. Torque converter TM-255
8. Oil pump assembly TM-256
9. 3rd one-way clutch TM-259
10. Gear system TM-204
11. Direct clutch TM-273
12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
28
No shock at all or the clutch slips when vehi-cle changes speed D2
→ D3 or M2 → M3.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-80
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Line pressure test TM-152
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
7. Torque converter TM-255
8. Oil pump assembly TM-256
9. 3rd one-way clutch TM-259
10. Gear system TM-204
11. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
12. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-124Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SYSTEM SYMPTOM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
T
29
Slips/Will Not En-gage
No shock at all or the clutch slips when vehi-cle changes speed D3
→ D4 or M3 → M4.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. Input clutch solenoid valve TM-77
4. Front brake solenoid valve TM-78
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Line pressure test TM-152
7. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
8. Torque converter TM-255
9. Oil pump assembly TM-256
10. Input clutch TM-261
11. Gear system TM-204
12. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
13. Direct clutch TM-273
30
No shock at all or the clutch slips when vehi-cle changes speed D4
→ D5 or M4 → M5.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. Front brake solenoid valve TM-78
4. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-79
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Line pressure test TM-152
7. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
8. Torque converter TM-255
9. Oil pump assembly TM-256
10. Front brake (brake band) TM-204
11. Input clutch TM-261
12. Gear system TM-204
13. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
31
When accelerator pedal is depressed and speed is shifted to D5→ D4 or M5 → M4 the engine idles or the A/T slips.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. Front brake solenoid valve TM-78
4. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-79
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Line pressure test TM-152
7. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
8. Torque converter TM-255
9. Oil pump assembly TM-256
10. Input clutch TM-261
11. Gear system TM-204
12. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
13. Direct clutch TM-273
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-125Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
32
Slips/Will Not En-gage
When accelerator pedal is depressed and speed is shifted to D4→ D3 or M4 → M3 the engine idles or the A/T slips.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. Input clutch solenoid valve TM-77
4. Front brake solenoid valve TM-78
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Line pressure test TM-152
7. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
8. Torque converter TM-255
9. Oil pump assembly TM-256
10. 3rd one-way clutch TM-259
11. Gear system TM-204
12. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
13. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
14. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
33
When accelerator pedal is depressed and speed is shifted to D3→ D2 or M3 → M2 the engine idles or the A/T slips.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-80
4. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-79
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Line pressure test TM-152
7. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
8. Torque converter TM-255
9. Oil pump assembly TM-256
10. 3rd one-way clutch TM-259
11. Gear system TM-204
12. Direct clutch TM-273
13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-126Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SYSTEM SYMPTOM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
T34
Slips/Will Not En-gage
When accelerator pedal is depressed and speed is shifted to D2→ D1 or M2 → M1 the engine idles or the A/T slips.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
3. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-79
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Line pressure test TM-152
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
7. Torque converter TM-255
8. Oil pump assembly TM-256
9. 3rd one-way clutch TM-259
10. 1st one-way clutch TM-266
11. Gear system TM-204
12. Reverse brake TM-214
13. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
14. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
35With selector lever in “D” position, accelera-tion is extremely poor.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Line pressure test TM-152
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Transmission range switch TM-49
6. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
7. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
8. Torque converter TM-255
9. Oil pump assembly TM-256
10. 1st one-way clutch TM-266
11. Gear system TM-204
12. Reverse brake TM-214
13. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
14. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-127Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
36
Slips/Will Not En-gage
With selector lever in “R” position, accelera-tion is extremely poor.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Line pressure test TM-152
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
4. High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-80
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Transmission range switch TM-49
7. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
8. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
9. Gear system TM-204
10. Output shaft TM-214
11. Reverse brake TM-214
37
While starting off by accelerating in 1st, en-gine races or slippage occurs.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Line pressure test TM-152
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
6. Torque converter TM-255
7. Oil pump assembly TM-256
8. 3rd one-way clutch TM-259
9. 1st one-way clutch TM-266
10. Gear system TM-204
11. Reverse brake TM-214
12. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-128Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SYSTEM SYMPTOM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
T
38
Slips/Will Not En-gage
While accelerating in 2nd, engine races or slippage occurs.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Line pressure test TM-152
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-79
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
7. Torque converter TM-255
8. Oil pump assembly TM-256
9. 3rd one-way clutch TM-259
10. Gear system TM-204
11. Direct clutch TM-273
12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
39While accelerating in 3rd, engine races or slippage occurs.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Line pressure test TM-152
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-80
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
7. Torque converter TM-255
8. Oil pump assembly TM-256
9. 3rd one-way clutch TM-259
10. Gear system TM-204
11. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
12. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
40While accelerating in 4th, engine races or slippage occurs.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Line pressure test TM-152
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Input clutch solenoid valve TM-77
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
7. Torque converter TM-255
8. Oil pump assembly TM-256
9. Input clutch TM-261
10. Gear system TM-204
11. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
12. Direct clutch TM-273
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-129Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
41
Slips/Will Not En-gage
While accelerating in 5th, engine races or slippage occurs.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Line pressure test TM-152
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Front brake solenoid valve TM-78
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
7. Torque converter TM-255
8. Oil pump assembly TM-256
9. Front brake (brake band) TM-204
10. Input clutch TM-261
11. Gear system TM-204
12. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
42 Slips at lock-up.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Line pressure test TM-152
3. Engine speed signal TM-55
4. Input speed sensor TM-51
5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-67
6. CAN communication line TM-45
7. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle8. Torque converter TM-255
9. Oil pump assembly TM-256
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-130Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SYSTEM SYMPTOM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
T
43
Slips/Will Not En-gage
No creep at all.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Line pressure test TM-152
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
4. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-79
5. Transmission range switch TM-49
6. CAN communication line TM-45
7. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
8. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
9. Torque converter TM-255
10. Oil pump assembly TM-256
11. 1st one-way clutch TM-266
12. Gear system TM-204
13. Reverse brake TM-214
14. Direct clutch TM-273
15. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
16. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
44Vehicle cannot run in all positions.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Line pressure test TM-152
3. Transmission range switch TM-49
4. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
5. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
6. Oil pump assembly TM-256
7. Gear system TM-204
8. Output shaft TM-214
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-131Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
45
Slips/Will Not En-gage
With selector lever in “D” position, driving is not possible.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Line pressure test TM-152
3. Transmission range switch TM-49
4. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
5. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
6. Torque converter TM-255
7. Oil pump assembly TM-256
8. 1st one-way clutch TM-266
9. Gear system TM-204
10. Reverse brake TM-214
11. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
46With selector lever in “R” position, driving is not possible.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Line pressure test TM-152
3. Transmission range switch TM-49
4. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
5. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
6. Gear system TM-204
7. Output shaft TM-214
8. Reverse brake TM-214
47Does Not Change
Does not change M5 → M4.
ON vehicle
1. Transmission range switch TM-49
2. A/T fluid leakage —
3. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
4. Manual mode switch TM-84
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle 7. Front brake (brake band) TM-204
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-132Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SYSTEM SYMPTOM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
T
48
Does Not Change
Does not change M4 → M3.
ON vehicle
1. Transmission range switch TM-49
2. A/T fluid leakage —
3. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
4. Manual mode switch TM-84
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle7. Front brake (brake band) TM-204
8. Input clutch TM-261
49Does not change M3 → M2.
ON vehicle
1. Transmission range switch TM-49
2. A/T fluid leakage —
3. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
4. Manual mode switch TM-84
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
7. Front brake (brake band) TM-204
8. Input clutch TM-261
9. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
50Does not change M2 → M1.
ON vehicle
1. Transmission range switch TM-49
2. A/T fluid leakage —
3. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
4. Manual mode switch TM-84
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
7. Input clutch TM-261
8. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
9. Direct clutch TM-273
51 Cannot be changed to manual mode.
ON vehicle
1. Manual mode switch TM-84
2. Input speed sensor TM-51
3. CAN communication line TM-45
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-133Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
52
Others
Shift point is high in “D” position.
ON vehicle
1. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
3. CAN communication line TM-45
4. A/T fluid temperature sensor TM-71
5. Control valve with TCM TM-168
53Shift point is low in “D” position.
ON vehicle
1. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
3. CAN communication line TM-45
4. Control valve with TCM TM-168
54Judder occurs during lock-up.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Engine speed signal TM-55
3. Input speed sensor TM-51
4. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
5. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
6. CAN communication line TM-45
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-67
8. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle 9. Torque converter TM-255
55Strange noise in “R” position.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Engine speed signal TM-55
3. CAN communication line TM-45
4. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
5. Torque converter TM-255
6. Oil pump assembly TM-256
7. Gear system TM-204
8. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
9. Reverse brake TM-214
56Strange noise in “N” position.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Engine speed signal TM-55
3. CAN communication line TM-45
4. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
5. Torque converter TM-255
6. Oil pump assembly TM-256
7. Gear system TM-204
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-134Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SYSTEM SYMPTOM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
T
57
Others
Strange noise in “D” position.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Engine speed signal TM-55
3. CAN communication line TM-45
4. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
5. Torque converter TM-255
6. Oil pump assembly TM-256
7. Gear system TM-204
8. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
58Vehicle does not de-celerate by engine brake.
ON vehicle
1. Transmission range switch TM-49
2. A/T fluid leakage —
3. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
4. Manual mode switch TM-84
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
7. Input clutch TM-261
8. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
9. Direct clutch TM-273
59Engine brake does not work M5 → M4.
ON vehicle
1. Transmission range switch TM-49
2. A/T fluid leakage —
3. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
4. Manual mode switch TM-84
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle 7. Front brake (brake band) TM-204
60Engine brake does not work M4 → M3.
ON vehicle
1. Transmission range switch TM-49
2. A/T fluid leakage —
3. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
4. Manual mode switch TM-84
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle7. Front brake (brake band) TM-204
8. Input clutch TM-261
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-135Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
61
Others
Engine brake does not work M3 → M2.
ON vehicle
1. Transmission range switch TM-49
2. A/T fluid leakage —
3. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
4. Manual mode switch TM-84
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
7. Front brake (brake band) TM-204
8. Input clutch TM-261
9. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
62Engine brake does not work M2 → M1.
ON vehicle
1. Transmission range switch TM-49
2. A/T fluid leakage —
3. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
4. Manual mode switch TM-84
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
7. Input clutch TM-261
8. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
9. Direct clutch TM-273
63 Maximum speed low.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Line pressure test TM-152
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
4. CAN communication line TM-45
5. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-79
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
7. Torque converter TM-255
8. Oil pump assembly TM-256
9. Input clutch TM-261
10. Gear system TM-204
11. High and low reverse clutch TM-271
12. Direct clutch TM-273
13. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
14. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-136Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SYSTEM SYMPTOM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
T
64
Others
Extremely large creep.ON vehicle
1. Engine idle speed EC-17
2. CAN communication line TM-45
OFF vehicle 3. Torque converter TM-255
65
With selector lever in “P” position, vehicle does not enter parking condition or, with se-lector lever in another position, parking con-dition is not cancelled.
ON vehicle
1. Transmission range switch TM-49
2. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
OFF vehicle 3. Parking components
TM-177 (2WD), TM-204 (AWD)
66Vehicle runs with A/T in “P” position.
ON vehicle
1. Transmission range switch TM-49
2. A/T fluid leakage —
3. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
4. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle5. Parking components
TM-177 (2WD), TM-204 (AWD)
6. Gear system TM-204
67Vehicle runs with A/T in “N” position.
ON vehicle
1. Transmission range switch TM-49
2. A/T fluid leakage —
3. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
4. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle
5. Input clutch TM-261
6. Gear system TM-204
7. Direct clutch TM-273
8. Reverse brake TM-214
9. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
10. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".)
TM-214
68Engine does not start in “N” or “P” position.
ON vehicle
1. Push-button ignition switch and starterPG-69, STR-9
2. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
3. Transmission range switch TM-49
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-137Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
69
Others
Engine starts in posi-tions other than “N” or “P”.
ON vehicle
1. Push-button ignition switch and starterPG-69, STR-9
2. A/T position
TM-158 (2WD), TM-158 (AWD)
3. Transmission range switch TM-49
70 Engine stall.ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Engine speed signal TM-55
3. Input speed sensor TM-51
4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-67
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle 7. Torque converter TM-255
71Engine stalls when se-lector lever shifted “N”→“D” or “R”.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Engine speed signal TM-55
3. Input speed sensor TM-51
4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-67
5. CAN communication line TM-45
6. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle 7. Torque converter TM-255
72Engine speed does not return to idle.
ON vehicle
1. A/T fluid leakage —
2. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-79
3. Front brake solenoid valve TM-78
4. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-70
5. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signalTM-52, TM-74
6. CAN communication line TM-45
7. Control valve with TCM TM-168
OFF vehicle8. Front brake (brake band) TM-204
9. Direct clutch TM-273
73A/T CHECK indicator lamp does not come on.
ON vehicle
1. CAN communication line TM-45
2. Combination metersMWI-6
3. Unified meter and A/C amp.
4. TCM power supply and ground TM-88
74Unable to perform self-diagnosis.
ON vehicle
1. CAN communication line TM-45
2. Transmission range switch TM-49
3. Manual mode switch TM-84
4. Closed throttle and wide open throttle position signal EC-445
5. Stop lamp switch signal SEC-52
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-138Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SYSTEM SYMPTOM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
T
75
Others
When brake pedal is depressed with igni-tion switch ON, selec-tor lever cannot be shifted from “P” posi-tion to other position.
ON vehicle
1. Stop lamp switch
TM-912. Shift lock relay
3. Shift lock solenoid
76
When brake pedal is not depressed with ig-nition switch ON, se-lector lever can be shifted from “P” posi-tion to other position.
ON vehicle
1. Stop lamp switch
TM-91
2. ICC brake hold relay (with ICC)
3. ICC sensor integrated unit (with ICC)
4. Shift lock relay
5. Shift lock solenoid
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
TM-139Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTIONPRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000005171799
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used alongwith a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certaintypes of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRSsystem uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one frontair bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of thisService Manual.WARNING:• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed byan authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personalinjury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air BagModule, see the “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in thisService Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERSWARNING:• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s)with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possiblycausing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect thebattery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of A/T and Engine INFOID:0000000005171800
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn thedriver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.CAUTION:• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal
before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoidvalves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector willcause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with abracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tubemay cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system, etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM andECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
TM-140Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
PRECAUTIONS[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< PRECAUTION >
T
General Precautions INFOID:0000000005171801
• Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cablefrom the negative terminal before connecting or disconnect-ing the A/T assembly harness connector. Because batteryvoltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turnedOFF.
• Perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATIONPROCEDURE” after performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.If the repair is completed DTC should not be displayed in the“DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-10, "Fluidsand Lubricants".
• Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work.• Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordi-
nance, etc. after replacing the ATF.• Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside
of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts frombecoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
• Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.• Use lint-free paper or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transmission.• Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.• All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.• Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the A/T is disassembled.• It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.• The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springsand small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
• Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.• Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and
seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease.• Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.• Clean or replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer. Refer to TM-
141, "Service Notice or Precaution".• Refill the transmission with new ATF after overhaul.• When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the ATF is drained. Old ATF will remain in torque con-
verter and ATF cooling system.Always follow the procedures under “Changing” and “Adjustment” when changing ATF. Refer to TM-145,"Changing", TM-146, "Adjustment".
Service Notice or Precaution INFOID:0000000005171802
ATF COOLER SERVICEIf ATF contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced,inspect and clean the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator or replace the radiator. Flush cooler lines usingcleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. For A/T fluid cooler cleaning procedure, refer to TM-148,"Cleaning". For radiator replacement, refer to CO-12, "Exploded View".
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS• A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through
the blinking pattern of the A/T CHECK indicator lamp or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the
SEF289H
SEF217U
TM-141Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >table on “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result. Referto TM-39, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)".
• The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memo-ries.Always perform the procedure on “How to Erase DTC” to complete the repair and avoid unnecessaryblinking of the MIL. Refer toTM-38, "Diagnosis Description".
For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-104, "Diagnosis Description".• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slide-lock-
ing type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-120, "Description".
TM-142Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
PREPARATION[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< PREPARATION >
T
PREPARATIONPREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000005171803
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number(Kent-Moore No.)Tool name
Description
ST2505S001(J-34301-C)Oil pressure gauge set1. ST25051001( — )Oil pressure gauge2. ST25052000( — )Hose3. ST25053000( — )Joint pipe4. ST25054000( — )Adapter5. ST25055000( — )Adapter
Measuring line pressure
KV31103600(J-45674)Joint pipe adapter(With ST25054000)
Measuring line pressure
ST33400001(J-26082)Drifta: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.
• Installing rear oil seal (2WD)• Installing oil pump housing oil seal
KV31102400(J-34285 and J-34285-87)Clutch spring compressora: 320 mm (12.60 in)b: 174 mm (6.85 in)
Installing reverse brake return spring retainer
ST25850000(J-25721-A)Sliding hammera: 179 mm (7.05 in)b: 70 mm (2.76 in)c: 40 mm (1.57 in)d: M12X1.75P
Remove oil pump assembly
SCIA3695J
ZZA1227D
NT086
NT423
NT422
TM-143Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000005171804
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Tool numberTool name
Description
Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts
Drifta: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
Installing manual shaft oil seals
Drifta: 64 mm (2.52 in) dia.
Installing rear oil seal (AWD)
Pin puncha: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia.
Remove retaining pin
1. 315268E000*O-ring
2. 310811EA5A*Charging pipe
A/T fluid changing and adjustment
PBIC0190E
NT083
SCIA5338E
NT410
JSDIA1332ZZ
TM-144Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
A/T FLUID[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
T
PERIODIC MAINTENANCEA/T FLUID
Changing INFOID:0000000005171805
CAUTION:• If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used.• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T
durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited war-ranty.
• When filling ATF, be careful not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust.1. Step 1a. Install the O-ring (315268E000) (A) to the charging pipe
(310811EA5A) (B).
2. Step 2a. Use CONSULT-III to check that the ATF temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less.b. Lift up the vehicle.c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan, and then drain the ATF.d. When the ATF starts to drip, temporarily tighten the drain plug to the oil pan.
NOTE:Never replace drain plug and drain plug gasket with new ones yet.
e. Remove overflow plug from oil pan.f. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
g. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe.CAUTION:Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of thecharging pipe.
h. Fill approximately 3 liters (3-1/8 US qt, 2-5/8 lmp qt) of the ATF.i. Remove the bucket pump hose to remove the charging pipe,
and then temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan.CAUTION:Quickly perform the procedure to avoid ATF leakage fromthe oil pan.
j. Lift down the vehicle.k. Start the engine and wait for approximately 3 minutes.l. Stop the engine.3. Step 3a. Repeat “Step 2”.4. Final Step
ATF : Refer to TM-275, "General Specification".
Fluid capacity : Refer to TM-275, "General Specification".
JSDIA1334ZZ
JSDIA1335ZZ
TM-145Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]A/T FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >a. Use CONSULT-III to check that the ATF temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less.b. Lift up the vehicle.c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan, and then drain the ATF.d. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the drain plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-168,
"Exploded View".CAUTION:Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket.
e. Remove overflow plug from oil pan.f. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
g. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe.CAUTION:Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of thecharging pipe.
h. Fill approximately 3 liters (3-1/8 US qt, 2-5/8 lmp qt) of the ATF.i. Remove the bucket pump hose to remove the charging pipe,
and then temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan.CAUTION:Quickly perform the procedure to avoid ATF leakage fromthe oil pan.
j. Lift down the vehicle.k. Start the engine.l. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE:The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP1” of “Data Monitor” using CONSULT-III.
m. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.n. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in “P” position.o. Lift up the vehicle when the ATF temperature reaches 40°C (104°F), and then remove the overflow plug
from the oil pan.p. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-
168, "Exploded View".CAUTION:Never reuse overflow plug.
Adjustment INFOID:0000000005171806
CAUTION:• If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used.• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T
durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited war-ranty.
• When filling ATF, be careful not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust.• Always maintain the ATF temperature within between 35°C (95°F) and 45°C (113°F) while checking
with CONSULT-III when the ATF level adjustment is performed.
JSDIA1335ZZ
ATF : Refer to TM-275, "General Specification".
Fluid capacity : Refer to TM-275, "General Specification".
TM-146Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
A/T FLUID[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
T
1. Install the O-ring (315268E000) (A) to the charging pipe(310811EA5A) (B).
2. Start the engine.3. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE:The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Alwayscheck the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP 1” of “Data Monitor”using CONSULT-III.
4. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.5. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selec-
tor lever in “P” position.6. Lift up the vehicle.7. Check the ATF leakage from transmission.8. Remove overflow plug from oil pan.9. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
10. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe.CAUTION:Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of thecharging pipe.
11. Fill approximately 0.5 liters (1/2 US qt, 1/2 lmp qt) of the ATF.12. Check that the ATF leaks when removing the charging pipe and
the bucket pump hose. If the ATF does not leak, refill the ATF.13. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the overflow plug to the oil
pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".CAUTION:Never reuse overflow plug.
JSDIA1334ZZ
JSDIA1335ZZ
TM-147Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]A/T FLUID COOLER
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
A/T FLUID COOLER
Cleaning INFOID:0000000005171807
Whenever an A/T is replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator must be inspected and cleaned.Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can con-taminate the newly serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of ATF. In either case, mal-function of the newly serviced A/T may result.Debris, if present, may build up as ATF enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the coolerthrough the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris.
CLEANING PROCEDURE1. Position an oil pan under the A/T inlet and outlet cooler hoses.2. Identify the inlet and outlet fluid cooler hoses.3. Disconnect the A/T fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses
from the steel cooler tubes or by-pass valve.NOTE:Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hoseremains on the tube fitting.
4. Allow any ATF that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into theoil pan.
5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of TransmissionCooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler out-let hose.CAUTION:• Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the
Transmission Cooler Cleaner.• Spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner only with adequate
ventilation.• Avoid contact with eyes and skin.• Never breathe vapors or spray mist.
6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmis-sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlethose until ATF flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.8. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and of the cooler outlet
hose.
9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (71 to 128 psi)through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out anyremaining ATF.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times.11. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the A/T
fluid cooler steel lines to the A/T.12. Remove the banjo bolts.13. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the A/T
by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds.
14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (71 to 128 psi) through each steel line from the coolerside back toward the A/T for 10 seconds to force out any remaining ATF.
15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines.16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings.17. Perform “DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE”.
JPDIA0711GB
JPDIA0712GB
JPDIA0713GB
TM-148Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
A/T FLUID COOLER[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
T
DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURENOTE:Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification.1. Position an oil pan under the A/T inlet and outlet cooler hoses.2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose.3. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission
Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler out-let hose.CAUTION:• Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the
Transmission Cooler Cleaner.• Spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner only with adequate
ventilation.• Avoid contact with eyes and skin.• Never breathe vapors or spray mist.
4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmis-sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlethose until ATF flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of thecooler inlet hose.
6. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.7. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet
hose.
8. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (71 to 128 psi)through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining ATF intothe coffee filter.
9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose.10. Perform “INSPECTION PROCEDURE”.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris.a. If small metal debris less than 1 mm (0.040 in) in size or metal
powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normaldebris is found, the A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used andthe procedure is ended.
JPDIA0712GB
JPDIA0714GB
JPDIA0715GB
SCIA2967E
TM-149Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]A/T FLUID COOLER
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1 mm
(0.040 in) in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found inthe coffee filter, the A/T fluid cooler is not serviceable. The A/Tfluid cooler/radiator must be replaced and the inspection proce-dure is ended. Refer to CO-12, "Exploded View".
Inspection INFOID:0000000005171808
After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components.
SCIA7031E
TM-150Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
STALL TEST[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
T
STALL TEST
Inspection and Judgment INFOID:0000000005171809
INSPECTION1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F). Inspect the amount of ATF. Replenish if necessary.3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.4. Start the engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D” position.5. Gradually press down the accelerator pedal while holding down the foot brake.6. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds during this test.
7. Shift the selector lever to the “N” position.8. Cool down the ATF.
CAUTION:Run the engine at idle for at least 1 minute.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 with selector lever in “R” position.
JUDGMENT OF STALL TEST
O: Stall speed within standard value position
H: Stall speed higher than standard value
L: Stall speed lower than standard value
Stall test standard value position
Stall speed : Refer to TM-275, "Stall Speed".
Selector lever positionPossible location of malfunction
“D” and “M” “R”
Stall speed
H O
• Forward brake• Forward one-way clutch• 1st one-way clutch• 3rd one-way clutch
O H • Reverse brake
L L • Engine and torque converter one-way clutch
H H • Line pressure low
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 1 → 2 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR or 4GR Direct clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 2 → 3 Slipping in 3GR, 4GR or 5GR High and low reverse clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 3 → 4 Slipping in 4GR or 5GR Input clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 4 → 5 Slipping in 5GR Front brake slippage
TM-151Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]LINE PRESSURE TEST
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
LINE PRESSURE TEST
Inspection and Judgment INFOID:0000000005171810
INSPECTION
Line Pressure Test Port
Line Pressure Test Procedure
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary.2. Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the ATF reaches in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F). Then inspect the amount of ATF and replenish if necessary.NOTE:The A/T fluid temperature rises in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) during 10 minutes of driving.
3. Remove the front propeller shaft from vehicle (with AWD models). Refer to DLN-77.4. After warming up remove the oil pressure detection plug and
install the oil pressure gauge [SST: ST2505S001(J-34301-C)].CAUTION:When using the oil pressure gauge, be sure to use the O-ring attached to the oil pressure detection plug.
5. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.6. Start the engine, then measure the line pressure at both idle and
the stall speed.CAUTION:• Keep the brake pedal pressed all the way down during
measurement.• When measuring the line pressure at the stall speed, refer
to TM-151, "Inspection and Judgment".
7. Install the oil pressure detection plug and tighten to the specified torque after the measurements are com-plete. Refer to TM-204, "Exploded View".CAUTION:• Never reuse O-ring.• Apply ATF to O-ring.
JUDGMENT OF LINE PRESSURE TEST
SCIA2187E
LINE PRESSURE : Refer to TM-276, "Line Pressure".
SCIA5309E
TM-152Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
LINE PRESSURE TEST[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
T
Judgment Possible cause
Idle speed
Low for all positions(“P”, “R”, “N”, “D”, “M”)
Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and low oil pump output.For example• Oil pump wear• Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking or spring fatigue• Oil strainer ⇒ oil pump ⇒ pressure regulator valve passage oil leak• Engine idle speed too low
Only low for a specific position
Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.
High
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the line pressure adjustment function.For example• Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction• A/T fluid temperature sensor malfunction• Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking in OFF state, filter clog, cut line)• Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
Stall speed
Oil pressure does not rise higher than the oil pressure for idle.
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the pressure adjustment func-tion.For example• Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction• TCM breakdown• Line pressure solenoid malfunction (shorting, sticking in ON state)• Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking• Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged
The pressure rises, but does not enter the stan-dard position.
Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and malfunction in the pressure adjustment function.For example• Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction• Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking, filter clog)• Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking• Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged
Only low for a specific position
Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.
TM-153Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]ROAD TEST
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
ROAD TEST
Description INFOID:0000000005171811
• The road test inspects overall performance of the A/T and analyzes possible malfunction causes.• The road test is performed out in the following three stages.1. TM-154, "Check Before Engine Is Started". 2. TM-154, "Check at Idle".3. Cruise test
• TM-155, "Cruise Test - Part 1"• TM-156, "Cruise Test - Part 2"• TM-156, "Cruise Test - Part 3"CAUTION:Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Check the test procedure and inspection items before beginning the road test.• Test all inspection items until the symptom is uncovered. Diagnose NG items when all road tests are com-
plete.
Check Before Engine Is Started INFOID:0000000005171812
1.CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP
1. Park vehicle on level surface.2. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.4. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp light up for about 2 seconds?YES >> Go to TM-154, "Check at Idle".NO >> Stop the road test and go to TM-115, "Symptom Table".
Check at Idle INFOID:0000000005171813
1.CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Park vehicle on level surface.2. Shift the selector lever to “P” or “N” position.3. Turn ignition switch OFF.4. Start the engine.Does the engine start?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Stop the road test and go to TM-115, "Symptom Table".
2.CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)2. Shift the selector lever to “D”, “M” or “R” position.3. Start the engine.Does the engine start in any positions?YES >> Stop the road test and go to TM-115, "Symptom Table".NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK “P” POSITION FUNCTIONS
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.2. Turn ignition switch OFF.3. Release the parking brake.4. Push the vehicle forward or backward.5. Engage the parking brake.When you push the vehicle while disengaging the parking brake, does it move?YES >> Record the malfunction, GO TO 4.NO >> GO TO 4.
TM-154Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
ROAD TEST[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
T
4.CHECK “N” POSITION FUNCTIONS
1. Start the engine.2. Shift the selector lever to “N” position.3. Release the parking brake.Does vehicle move forward or backward?YES >> Record the malfunction, GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK SHIFT SHOCK
1. Engage the brake.2. Shift the selector lever to “D” position.When the A/T is shifted from “N” to “D”, is there an excessive shock?YES >> Record the malfunction, GO TO 6.NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK “R” POSITION FUNCTIONS
1. Shift the selector lever to “R” position.2. Release the brake for 4 to 5 seconds.Does the vehicle creep backward?YES >> GO TO 7.NO >> Record the malfunction, GO TO 7.
7.CHECK “D” POSITION FUNCTIONS
Inspect whether the vehicle creeps forward when the A/T is put into the “D” position.Does the vehicle creep forward in the “D” position?YES >> Go to TM-155, "Cruise Test - Part 1".NO >> Record the malfunction and go to TM-155, "Cruise Test - Part 1".
Cruise Test - Part 1 INFOID:0000000005171814
1.CHECK STARTING OUT FROM D1
1. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes to warm up the engine oil and ATF.Appropriate temperature for the ATF: 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F)
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface.3. Shift the selector lever to “D” position.4. Press the accelerator pedal about half-way down to accelerate the vehicle.
With CONSULT-IIIRead the value of “GEAR” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.Starts from D1?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Record the malfunction, GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SHIFT-UP
Depress the accelerator pedal about half-way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D1→ D2→ D3→ D4→ D5) atthe appropriate speed. Refer to TM-275, "Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs".
With CONSULT-IIIRead the value of “GEAR”, “ACCELE POSI” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Record the malfunction, GO TO 3.
3.CHECK LOCK-UP
When releasing accelerator pedal (closed throttle position signal OFF) from D5, check lock-up from D5 to L/U.Refer to TM-275, "Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases".
With CONSULT-IIISelect “TCC SOLENOID” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-102, "Reference Value".
TM-155Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]ROAD TEST
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >Does it lock-up?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Record the malfunction, GO TO 4.
4.CHECK LOCK-UP HOLD
Check hold lock-up.
With CONSULT-IIISelect “TCC SOLENOID” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-102, "Reference Value".Does it maintain lock-up status?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Record the malfunction, GO TO 5.
5.CHECK LOCK-UP RELEASE
Check lock-up cancellation by depressing brake pedal lightly to decelerate.
With CONSULT-IIISelect “TCC SOLENOID” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-102, "Reference Value".Does lock-up cancel?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Record the malfunction, GO TO 6.
6.CHECK SHIFT-DOWN D5→ D4
Decelerate by pressing lightly on the brake pedal.
With CONSULT-IIIRead the value of “GEAR” and “ENGINE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.When the A/T shift-down D5→ D4, does the engine speed drop smoothly back to idle?YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Go to TM-156, "Cruise Test - Part 2".NO >> Record the malfunction and go to TM-156, "Cruise Test - Part 2".
Cruise Test - Part 2 INFOID:0000000005171815
1.CHECK SHIFT-UP
Depress the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the A/T shifts up (D1→ D2→ D3) atthe correct speed. Refer to TM-275, "Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs".
With CONSULT-IIIRead the value of “GEAR”, “ACCELE POSI” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Record the malfunction, GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SHIFT-UP D3→ D4 AND ENGINE BRAKE
When the A/T changes speed D3→ D4, release the accelerator pedal.
With CONSULT-IIIRead the value of “GEAR” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.Does the A/T shift-up D3→ D4 and apply the engine brake?YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Go to TM-156, "Cruise Test - Part 3".NO >> Record the malfunction and go to TM-156, "Cruise Test - Part 3".
Cruise Test - Part 3 INFOID:0000000005171816
1.MANUAL MODE FUNCTION
Shift the selector lever to manual mode from “D” position.Does it switch to manual mode?YES >> GO TO 2.
TM-156Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
ROAD TEST[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
T
NO >> Record the malfunction, GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SHIFT-DOWN
During manual mode driving, is downshift from M5 → M4 → M3 → M2 → M1 performed?
With CONSULT-IIIRead the value of “GEAR” and “ENGINE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Record the malfunction, GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ENGINE BRAKE
Check engine brake.Does engine braking effectively reduce speed in M1 position?YES >> Check malfunction phenomena to repair or replace malfunctioning part. Refer to TM-115, "Symp-
tom Table".NO >> 1. Record the malfunction.
2. Check malfunction phenomena to repair or replace malfunctioning part. Refer to TM-115,"Symptom Table".
TM-157Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]A/T POSITION
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
A/T POSITION2WD
2WD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005171817
INSPECTION1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop).2. Check that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also
check that selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed.3. Shift the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.4. Confirm that the selector lever stops at each position by feeling the engagement when it is moved through
all the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever matches the position shownby the shift position indicator and the A/T body.
5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions cor-rectly is shown in the figure.
6. When selector button is pressed in “P”, “R”, or “N” position with-out applying forward/backward force to selector lever, check but-ton operation for sticking.
7. Confirm that the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever isplaced in the “R” position. Confirm that the back-up lamps doesnot illuminate when selector lever is pushed against “R” positionin the “P” or “N” position.
8. Confirm that the engine can only be started with the selectorlever in the “P” and “N” positions. (With selector lever in the “P”position, engine can be started even when selector lever ismoved forward and backward.)
9. Make sure that A/T is locked completely in “P” position.10. DS mode must be indicated on the combination meter when the selector lever is shifted to the manual
shift gate. When the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in the DS mode, manual mode should beindicated on the combination meter.In addition, a set shift position must be changed when the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side inthe manual mode. (Only while driving.)
ADJUSTMENT1. Loosen nut ( ) of pivot pin (1).2. Place transmission range switch and selector lever in “P” posi-
tion.3. While pressing lower lever (A) of A/T shift selector assembly
toward rear of vehicle (in “P” position direction), tighten nut tospecified torque. Refer to TM-160, "2WD : Exploded View".CAUTION:Be careful not to touch the control rod while pressing lowerlever of A/T shift selector assembly.NOTE:Press lower lever of A/T shift selector assembly with a force ofapproximately 1 kg (9.8 N).
AWD
AWD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005171818
INSPECTION1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop).2. Check that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also
check that selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed.3. Shift the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
SCIA6760E
JSDIA0134ZZ
TM-158Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
A/T POSITION[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
T
4. Confirm that the selector lever stops at each position by feeling the engagement when it is moved throughall the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever matches the position shownby the shift position indicator and the A/T body.
5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions cor-rectly is shown in the figure.
6. When selector button is pressed in “P”, “R”, or “N” position with-out applying forward/backward force to selector lever, check but-ton operation for sticking.
7. Confirm that the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever isplaced in the “R” position. Confirm that the back-up lamps do notilluminate when selector lever is pushed against “R” position inthe “P” or “N” position.
8. Confirm that the engine can only be started with the selectorlever in the “P” and “N” positions. (With selector lever in the “P”position, engine can be started even when selector lever ismoved forward and backward.)
9. Make sure that A/T is locked completely in “P” position.10. DS mode must be indicated on the combination meter when the selector lever is shifted to the manual
shift gate. When the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in the DS mode, manual mode should beindicated on the combination meter.In addition, a set shift position must be changed when the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side inthe manual mode. (Only while driving.)
ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen nut ( ) of pivot pin (1).2. Place transmission range switch and selector lever in “P” posi-
tion.3. While pressing lower lever (A) of A/T shift selector assembly
toward rear of vehicle (in “P” position direction), tighten nut tospecified torque. Refer to TM-163, "AWD : Exploded View".CAUTION:Be careful not to touch the control rod while pressing lowerlever of A/T shift selector assembly.NOTE:Press lower lever of shift selector assembly with a force ofapproximately 1 kg (9.8 N).
SCIA6760E
JPDIA0058ZZ
TM-159Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONA/T SHIFT SELECTOR2WD
2WD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171819
JSDIA1041GB
TM-160Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T2WD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005171820
REMOVAL1. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector assembly.2. Shift the selector lever to “N” position.3. Remove knob cover (A) below selector lever downward.4. Pull lock pin (1) out of selector lever knob (2).5. Remove selector lever knob.6. Remove console finisher assembly and center console assem-
bly. Refer to IP-22, "Exploded View".CAUTION:when disconnecting selector lever position indicator con-nector from shift position switch, never twist or apply anexcessive load to the connector.
7. Remove the rear ventilator duct 1 (with rear ventilation). Refer toVTL-13, "Exploded View".
8. Disconnect A/T shift selector harness connector and harness clips.9. Remove A/T shift selector assembly mounting bolts.10. Remove A/T shift selector assembly.11. Remove selector lever position indicator from console finisher assembly.a. Remove ashtray (front) (1) from console finisher assembly.
b. Remove insert finisher (1) from console finisher assembly.
1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Console finisher
4. Ashtray (front) 5. Selector lever position indicator 6. Harness connector
7. Insert finisher 8. Dust cover plate 9. Dust cover
10. Bracket 11. Control rod 12. Pivot pin
13. Plain washer 14. Collar 15. Snap pin
16. Insulator 17. Shift lock unit 18. A/T shift selector assembly
19. Adapter
: Apply multi-purpose grease.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
: Screw
JPDIA0634ZZ
JPDIA0635ZZ
A : Screw (small)
B : Screw (large)
JPDIA0636ZZ
TM-161Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >c. Remove the selector lever position indicator (1).
12. Remove harness connector from selector lever position indica-tor.
13. Remove adapter from A/T shift selector assembly.14. Remove dust cover and dust cover plate from A/T shift selector
assembly.15. Remove dust cover plate from dust cover.16. Remove shift lock unit from A/T shift selector assembly.17. Remove bracket from vehicle floor panel.
INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:Apply multi-purpose grease on the surface that the shift lock unit plate slides vertically.• When installing control rod to A/T shift selector assembly, refer to “ADJUSTMENT”. Refer to TM-158, "2WD
: Inspection and Adjustment".
2WD : Inspection INFOID:0000000005171821
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATIONCheck A/T positions. Refer to TM-158, "2WD : Inspection and Adjustment".AWD
: Screw
JPDIA0637ZZ
TM-162Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
AWD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171822
1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Console finisher
4. Ashtray (front) 5. Selector lever position indicator 6. Harness connector
7. Insert finisher 8. Control rod 9. Dust cover
10. Bracket 11. Dust cover plate 12. Snap pin
JSDIA1271GB
TM-163Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
AWD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005171823
REMOVAL1. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector assembly.2. Shift the selector lever to “N” position.3. Remove knob cover (A) below selector lever downward.4. Pull lock pin (1) out of selector lever knob (2).5. Remove selector lever knob.6. Remove console finisher assembly and center console assem-
bly. Refer to IP-22, "Exploded View".CAUTION:When disconnecting selector lever position indicator con-nector from shift position switch, never twist or apply anexcessive load to the connector.
7. Remove the rear ventilator duct 1 (with rear ventilation). Refer toVTL-13, "Exploded View".
8. Disconnect A/T shift selector harness connector.9. Remove harness clips from A/T shift selector assembly.10. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.11. Move passenger’s seat to the end.12. Remove A/T shift selector assembly mounting bolts.13. Slightly lift the A/T shift selector assembly (1) and slide it right-
ward. Then pull it out in the diagonally right direction.
14. Remove selector lever position indicator from console finisher assembly.a. Remove ashtray (front) (1) from console finisher assembly.
13. Plain washer 14. Collar 15. Pivot pin
16. Insulator 17. Shift lock unit 18. A/T shift selector assembly
19. Adapter
: Apply multi-purpose grease.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
JPDIA0634ZZ
JPDIA0055ZZ
: Screw
JPDIA0635ZZ
TM-164Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
b. Remove insert finisher (1) from console finisher assembly.
c. Remove the selector lever position indicator (1).
15. Remove adapter from A/T shift selector assembly.16. Remove dust cover and dust cover plate from A/T shift selector
assembly.17. Remove dust cover plate from dust cover.18. Remove shift lock unit from A/T shift selector assembly.19. Remove bracket from vehicle floor panel.
INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:• Apply multi-purpose grease on the pin surface (that slides after installing a collar) of pivot pin.• Apply multi-purpose grease on the surface that the shift lock unit plate slides vertically.• When installing control rod to A/T shift selector assembly, refer to “ADJUSTMENT”. Refer to TM-158, "AWD
: Inspection and Adjustment".
AWD : Inspection INFOID:0000000005171824
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATIONCheck A/T positions. Refer to TM-158, "AWD : Inspection and Adjustment".
A : Screw (small)
B : Screw (large)
JPDIA0636ZZ
: Screw
JPDIA0637ZZ
TM-165Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]CONTROL ROD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CONTROL ROD
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171825
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005171826
REMOVAL1. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-160, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD
models), TM-163, "AWD : Exploded View" (AWD models).2. Remove manual lever from A/T assembly.3. Remove control rod from manual lever.
INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:Apply multi-purpose grease on the pin surface (that slides after installing collar) of the tip of the con-trol rod.• When installing control rod to A/T shift selector assembly, refer to “ADJUSTMENT”. Refer to TM-158, "2WD
: Inspection and Adjustment" (2WD models), TM-158, "AWD : Inspection and Adjustment" (AWD models).
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005171827
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
1. Control rod 2. Plain washer 3. Manual shaft
4. A/T assembly 5. Manual lever 6. Washer
7. Snap pin 8. Conical washer 9. Insulator
10. Collar
: Apply multi-purpose grease.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
JSDIA1272GB
TM-166Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
CONTROL ROD[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
Adjust A/T position. Refer to TM-158, "2WD : Inspection and Adjustment" (2WD models), TM-158, "AWD :Inspection and Adjustment" (AWD models).
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATIONCheck A/T positions. Refer to TM-158, "2WD : Inspection and Adjustment" (2WD models), TM-158, "AWD :Inspection and Adjustment" (AWD models).
TM-167Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171828
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005171829
REMOVAL1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.2. Drain ATF through drain plug.3. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
1. A/T 2. Snap ring 3. Sub-harness
4. Bracket 5. Control valve with TCM 6. Bracket
7. A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 8. Oil pan gasket 9. Clip
10. Oil pan mounting bolt 11. Overflow plug 12. Oil pan
13. Magnet 14. Drain plug 15. Drain plug gasket
16. Terminal cord assembly 17. O-ring
A. For tightening torque, refer to “Installation”.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JSDIA1033GB
TM-168Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
4. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 connectors (A).
5. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 harness (B) from clips (1).6. Remove bracket (2) from transmission assembly.7. Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
8. Remove snap ring (1) from A/T assembly connector (A).
9. Push A/T assembly connector (A).CAUTION:Be careful not to damage connector.
10. Remove clips (1).11. Remove oil pan (2) and oil pan gasket.
12. Remove magnets (1) from oil pan.
: Vehicle front
: Bolt
SCIA8269E
JPDIA0007ZZ
JPDIA0008ZZ
: Vehicle front
: Oil pan mounting bolt
JSDIA0937ZZ
JPDIA0009ZZ
TM-169Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >13. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector (A).
CAUTION:Be careful not to damage connector.
14. Disengage terminal clips ( ).
15. Disconnect output speed sensor connector (A).CAUTION:Be careful not to damage connector.
16. Disengage terminal clip ( ).
17. Remove bolts (A), (B) and (C) from control valve with TCM.
18. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.CAUTION:When removing, be careful with the manual valve (1) notchand manual plate (2) height. Remove it vertically.
19. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (1) with bracket (2) fromcontrol valve with TCM.
SCIA8124E
JPDIA0011ZZ
: Vehicle front
SCIA8074E
JPDIA0012ZZ
: Bolt
JPDIA0013ZZ
TM-170Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
20. Remove bracket (1) from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (2).
21. Remove O-ring (1) from A/T assembly connector (A).
22. Disconnect TCM connectors (A) and (B).CAUTION:Be careful not to damage connectors.
23. Remove A/T assembly connector (A) from control valve withTCM with flat-blade screwdriver (B).
24. Disconnect TCM connector (A) and transmission range switchconnector (B).CAUTION:Be careful not to damage connectors.
JPDIA0014ZZ
JPDIA0015ZZ
JPDIA0016ZZ
JPDIA0017ZZ
JPDIA0018ZZ
TM-171Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:• Be careful not to damage connector when installing any connector.• Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket.• Never reuse O-ring.• Apply ATF to O-ring.• Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM when installing A/T fluid tempera-
ture sensor 2 (with bracket).• Refer to the followings when installing control valve with TCM to transmission case.
CAUTION:• Make sure that input speed sensor securely installs input
speed sensor holes (B).
• Hang down output speed sensor harness toward outside soas not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM.
• Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valvewith TCM to terminal hole of transmission case.
• Assemble it so that manual valve (1) cutout is engaged withmanual plate (2) projection.
- Install bolts (A), (B) and (C) to control valve with TCM. Tighten bolt1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tightenthem in order (1 → 2 → 3), and then tighten other bolts. Tightencontrol valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque.
A : Brake band
JPDIA0020ZZ
JPDIA0012ZZ
: Vehicle front
Bolt symbol A B C
Number of bolts 5 6 1
Length mm (in) 42 (1.65) 55 (2.17) 40 (1.57)
Tightening torqueN·m (kg-m, in-lb)
7.9 (0.81, 70)With ATF applied
7.9 (0.81, 70)
SCIA8075E
TM-172Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
• Refer to the followings when installing oil pan (2) (with oil pan gas-ket) and clips (1) to transmission case.
CAUTION:• Never reuse oil pan gasket and oil pan mounting bolts.• Install oil pan gasket in the direction to align hole position.• Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as shown
in the figure.• Be careful not to pinch harnesses.• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan mounting surface.
- Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numericalorder shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them. Tightenoil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque.
Inspection INFOID:0000000005171830
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVALCheck foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of mal-function. If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreignparticles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replace-ment. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up.Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and caninhibit pump pressure.• If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to TM-148, "Cleaning".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATIONCheck for A/T fluid leakage.
: Vehicle front
: Oil pan mounting bolt
: Vehicle front
JSDIA0937ZZ
JSDIA0941ZZ
SCIA5199E
TM-173Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171831
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005171832
REMOVAL1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.2. Drain ATF through drain plug.3. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".4. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 connectors (A).
5. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 harness (B) from clips (1).6. Remove bracket (2) from transmission assembly.
1. A/T 2. Bracket 3. Bracket
4. A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 5. Clip 6. Oil pan mounting bolt
7. Overflow plug 8. Oil pan 9. Magnet
10. Drain plug 11. Drain plug gasket 12. Oil pan gasket
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JSDIA1034GB
: Vehicle front
: Bolt
SCIA8269E
TM-174Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
7. Remove clips (1).8. Remove oil pan (2) and oil pan gasket.
9. Remove magnets (1) from oil pan.
10. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector (A).CAUTION:Be careful not to damage connector.
11. Disengage terminal clip ( ).
12. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (1) with bracket (2) fromcontrol valve with TCM.
13. Remove bracket (1) from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (2).
: Vehicle front
: Oil pan mounting bolt
JSDIA0937ZZ
JPDIA0009ZZ
SCIA8125E
: Bolt
JPDIA0025ZZ
JPDIA0014ZZ
TM-175Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:• Be careful not to damage connector.• Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket.• Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM when installing A/T fluid tempera-
ture sensor 2 (with bracket).• Refer to the following when installing oil pan (2) (with oil pan gas-
ket) and clips (1) to transmission case.
CAUTION:• Never reuse oil pan gasket and oil pan mounting bolts.• Install oil pan gasket in the direction to align hole position.• Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as shown
in the figure.• Be careful not to pinch harnesses.• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan mounting surface.
- Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numericalorder shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them. Tightenoil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque.
Inspection INFOID:0000000005171833
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVALCheck foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of mal-function. If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreignparticles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replace-ment. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up.Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and caninhibit pump pressure.• If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to TM-148, "Cleaning".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATIONCheck A/T fluid leakage.
: Vehicle front
: Oil pan mounting bolt
: Vehicle front
JSDIA0937ZZ
JSDIA0941ZZ
SCIA5199E
TM-176Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
PARKING COMPONENTS[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
PARKING COMPONENTS2WD
2WD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171834
2WD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005171835
REMOVAL1. Drain ATF through drain plug.2. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".3. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-83, "Exploded View".4. Remove control rod. Refer to TM-166, "Exploded View".5. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:When setting transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug.
6. Remove rear engine mounting member with power tool. Refer to EM-79, "2WD : Exploded View".7. Remove engine mounting insulator (rear). Refer to EM-79, "2WD : Exploded View".
1. Rear oil seal 2. Rear extension 3. Parking actuator support
4. Return spring 5. Parking pawl 6. Pawl shaft
7. Self-sealing bolt 8. Seal ring 9. Parking gear
10. Output shaft 11. Bearing race 12. Needle bearing
*: Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-18, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
SCIA8364E
TM-177Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]PARKING COMPONENTS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >8. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and trans-
mission case.
9. Tap rear extension assembly with a soft hammer (A).
10. Remove rear extension assembly (with needle bearing) fromtransmission case.
11. Remove bearing race (1) from output shaft (2).
12. Remove output shaft (1) from transmission case by rotating left/right.
1 : Self-sealing bolt
A : Bolt
JPDIA0026ZZ
JPDIA0027ZZ
SCIA3431E
JPDIA0057ZZ
JPDIA0028ZZ
TM-178Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
PARKING COMPONENTS[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
13. Remove parking gear (1) from output shaft (2).
14. Remove seal rings (1) from output shaft.
15. Remove needle bearing (1) from rear extension.
16. Remove parking actuator support (1) from rear extension.
17. Remove parking pawl (with return spring) (1) and pawl shaft (2)from rear extension.
JPDIA0029ZZ
JPDIA0030ZZ
SCIA6179J
JPDIA0031ZZ
JPDIA0032ZZ
TM-179Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]PARKING COMPONENTS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
18. Remove return spring (1) from parking pawl (2).
19. Remove rear oil seal (1) from rear extension with a flat-bladescrewdriver (A).CAUTION:Be careful not to scratch rear extension.
INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:• Never reuse seal rings and drain plug gasket.• Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing and seal rings.• Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pawl and the parking actuator support when assem-
bling the rear extension assembly. • As shown in the figure, use a drift [SST: ST33400001 (J-26082)]
(A) to drive rear oil seal into the rear extension until it is flush.CAUTION:• Never reuse rear oil seal.• Apply ATF to rear oil seal.
• Refer to the followings installing rear extension assembly.
SCIA6180J
JPDIA0033ZZ
JPDIA0035ZZ
TM-180Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
PARKING COMPONENTS[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
- Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket orequivalent. Refer to GI-18, "Recommended Chemical Productsand Sealants".) to rear extension assembly as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc. fromthe transmission case and rear extension assembly mountingsurfaces.
- Tighten rear extension assembly bolts to the specified torque.
2WD : Inspection INFOID:0000000005171836
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
A : Start and finish point shall be in the center of two bolts.
B : 3 – 5 mm (0.12 – 0.20 in)Sealant width (C)
: 1.0 – 2.0 mm (0.04 – 0.08 in)
Sealant height (C)
: 0.4 – 1.0 mm (0.016 – 0.04 in)
JPDIA0036ZZ
1 : Self-sealing bolt
A : Bolt
JPDIA0026ZZ
TM-181Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]PARKING COMPONENTS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >If the contact surface on parking actuator support (1), parking pawl(2) and etc. has excessive wear, abrasion, bend, or any other dam-age, replace the components.
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATIONAdjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-146, "Adjustment".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATIONCheck the following items.• A/T fluid leakage.• A/T position. Refer to TM-158, "2WD : Inspection and Adjustment".
JPDIA0034ZZ
TM-182Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
REAR OIL SEAL[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
REAR OIL SEAL2WD
2WD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171837
2WD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005171838
REMOVAL1. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-83, "Exploded View".3. Remove rear oil seal (1) with a flat-bladed screwdriver (A).
CAUTION:Be careful not to scratch rear extension assembly.
INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.• As shown in the figure, use the drift [SST: ST33400001 (J-26082)]
(A) to drive rear oil seal into rear extension assembly until it isflush.CAUTION:• Never reuse rear oil seal.• Apply ATF to rear oil seal.
1. Rear oil seal 2. A/T
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JSDIA0176ZZ
JPDIA0037ZZ
JPDIA0039ZZ
TM-183Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]REAR OIL SEAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2WD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005171839
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATIONAdjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-146, "Adjustment".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATIONCheck A/T fluid leakage.AWD
AWD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171840
AWD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005171841
REMOVAL1. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-91, "Exploded View".3. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".4. Remove three way catalyst (right bank). Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View"5. Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-77, "Exploded View".6. Remove transfer assembly from A/T assembly. Refer to DLN-52, "Exploded View".7. Remove rear oil seal (1) with a flat-bladed screwdriver (A).
CAUTION:Be careful not to scratch adapter case assembly.
INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
1. Rear oil seal 2. A/T
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JSDIA0177ZZ
JPDIA0038ZZ
TM-184Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
REAR OIL SEAL[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
• As shown in the figure, use the drift [64 mm (2.52 in) dia. commer-cial service tool] (A) to drive rear oil seal into adapter case assem-bly until it is flush.CAUTION:• Never reuse rear oil seal.• Apply ATF to rear oil seal.
AWD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005171842
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATIONAdjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-146, "Adjustment".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATIONCheck A/T fluid leakage.
JPDIA0040ZZ
TM-185Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR2WD
2WD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171843
2WD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005171844
REMOVAL1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.2. Drain ATF through drain plug.3. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".4. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-83, "Exploded View".5. Remove control rod. Refer to TM-166, "Exploded View".6. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
1. Rear extension 2. A/T 3. Bracket
4. Oil pan gasket 5. Clip 6. Oil pan mounting bolt
7. Overflow plug 8. Oil pan 9. Magnet
10. Drain plug 11. Drain plug gasket 12. Output speed sensor
13. Self-sealing bolt
*: Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-18, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
JSDIA1035GB
TM-186Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
7. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 connectors (A).
8. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 harness (B) from clips (1).9. Remove bracket (2) from transmission assembly.
10. Remove clips (1).11. Remove oil pan (2) and oil pan gasket.
12. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack.CAUTION:When setting transmission jack, place wooden blocks toprevent from damaging control valve with TCM and trans-mission case.
13. Remove rear engine mounting member with power tool. Refer to EM-79, "2WD : Exploded View".14. Remove engine mounting insulator (rear). Refer to EM-79, "2WD : Exploded View".15. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and trans-
mission case.
16. Tap rear extension assembly with a soft hammer (A).
: Vehicle front
: Bolt
SCIA8269E
: Vehicle front
: Oil pan mounting bolt
1 : Self-sealing bolt
A : Bolt
JSDIA0937ZZ
JPDIA0026ZZ
JPDIA0027ZZ
TM-187Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >17. Remove rear extension assembly (with needle bearing) from
transmission case.
18. Disconnect output speed sensor connector (A).CAUTION:Be careful not to damage connector
19. Disengage terminal clip ( ).
20. Remove output speed sensor (1) from transmission case.
CAUTION:• Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.• Never disassemble.• Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front
edge magnetic area.• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order removal.CAUTION:• Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pole and the parking actuator support when assem-
bling the rear extension assembly. • Never reuse drain plug gasket.• Refer to the followings when installing output speed sensor.
CAUTION:• Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.• Never disassemble.• Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front edge magnetic area.• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
• Refer to the followings when installing rear extension assembly.
SCIA3431E
JPDIA0011ZZ
: Bolt
JPDIA0041ZZ
TM-188Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
- Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket orequivalent. Refer to GI-18, "Recommended Chemical Productsand Sealants".) to rear extension assembly as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc. fromtransmission case and rear extension assembly mountingsurfaces.
- Tighten rear extension assembly bolts to the specified torque.
• Refer to the followings when installing oil pan (2) (with oil pan gas-ket) and clips (1) to transmission case.
CAUTION:• Never reuse oil pan gasket and oil pan mounting gasket.• Install oil pan gasket in the direction to align hole position.• Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as shown
in the figure.• Be careful not to pinch harnesses.• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan mounting surface.
A : Start and finish point shall be in the center of two bolts.
B : 3 – 5 mm (0.12 – 0.20 in)Sealant width (C)
: 1.0 – 2.0 mm (0.04 – 0.08 in)
Sealant height (C)
: 0.4 – 1.0 mm (0.016 – 0.04 in)
JPDIA0036ZZ
1 : Self-searing bolt
A : Bolt
JPDIA0026ZZ
: Vehicle front
: Oil pan mounting bolt
JSDIA0937ZZ
TM-189Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >- Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numerical
order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them. Tightennecessary oil pan mounting bolts with specified torque.
2WD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005171845
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVALCheck foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of mal-function. If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreignparticles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replace-ment. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up.Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and caninhibit pump pressure.• If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to TM-148, "Cleaning".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATIONAdjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-146, "Adjustment".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATIONCheck the following items.• A/T fluid leakage.• A/T position. Refer to TM-158, "2WD : Inspection and Adjustment".
: Vehicle front
JSDIA0941ZZ
SCIA5199E
TM-190Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
AIR BREATHER HOSE[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
AIR BREATHER HOSE2WD
2WD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171846
2WD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005171847
REMOVAL1. Remove air cleaner case (RH). Refer to EM-27, "Exploded View".2. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".3. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".4. Remove three way catalyst (right bank). Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".5. Remove air breather hose.
INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION:
1. Air breather box 2. Clip 3. Air breather hose
4. Bracket
A. For tightening torque, refer to TM-198, "2WD : Removal and Installation". B. Air breather tube
JSDIA1042ZZ
TM-191Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]AIR BREATHER HOSE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >• When installing an air breather hose, be careful not to be crushed or blocked by folding or bending
the hose.• When inserting an air breather hose to the air breather tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end
reaches the radius curve end.• Ensure clips are securely installed to brackets when installing air breather hose to brackets.• When inserting air breather hose to air breather box, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the
stop.• Install air breather hose to air breather box so that the paint mark is facing backward.AWD
AWD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171848
AWD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005171849
REMOVAL1. Remove air cleaner case (RH). Refer to EM-27, "Exploded View".2. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
1. Water outlet (rear) 2. Air breather hose 3. Clip
4. Air breather vent
A. Air breather tube
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JSDIA1043GB
TM-192Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
AIR BREATHER HOSE[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
3. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".4. Remove three way catalyst (right bank). Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".5. Remove air breather hose.
INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:• When installing an air breather hose, be careful not to be crushed or blocked by folding or bending
the hose.• When inserting an air breather hose to the air breather tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end
reaches the radius curve end.• Ensure clip is securely installed to bracket when installing air breather hose to bracket.• Install air breather hose to air breather vent so that the paint mark is facing upward.
TM-193Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]A/T FLUID COOLER TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
A/T FLUID COOLER TUBE2WD
2WD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171850
2WD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005171851
REMOVAL1. Remove the engine lower cover with power tool. Refer to EXT-31, "Exploded View".2. Remove the exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".3. Remove the suspension member stay. Refer to FSU-18, "Exploded View".
1. Engine assembly 2. A/T assembly 3. Copper washer
4. A/T fluid cooler tube 5. A/T fluid cooler tube 6. Bracket
7. Clip
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JPDIA0554GB
TM-194Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
A/T FLUID COOLER TUBE[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
4. Pull out the A/T fluid cooler hose from the A/T fluid cooler tube. Refer to CO-12, "Exploded View"5. Remove the A/T fluid cooler tube from the A/T assembly and engine assembly.6. Remove the stabilizer bar. Refer to FSU-17, "Exploded View".7. Loosen the lower mounting nuts for the engine mounting insulators (RH and LH). Refer to EM-79, "2WD :
Exploded View".8. Set a jack to the engine assembly and slightly lift the engine assembly.
CAUTION:Never pull the harnesses, hoses, etc. excessively.
9. Remove the A/T fluid cooler tube from the vehicle.CAUTION:Be careful not to bend A/T fluid cooler tube.
INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.
2WD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005171852
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATIONAdjustment A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-146, "Adjustment".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATIONCheck A/T fluid leakage.AWD
TM-195Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]A/T FLUID COOLER TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
AWD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171853
AWD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005171854
REMOVAL1. Remove the engine lower cover and front under cover with power tool. Refer to EXT-31, "Exploded View".2. Remove the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-37, "Exploded View".3. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".4. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".5. Remove the three way catalyst (right bank). Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".6. Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-77, "Exploded View".
1. Engine assembly 2. A/T assembly 3. Copper washer
4. A/T fluid cooler tube 5. A/T fluid cooler tube 6. Clip
7. Bracket 8. Bracket
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JPDIA0559GB
TM-196Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
A/T FLUID COOLER TUBE[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
7. Pull out the A/T fluid cooler hose from the A/T fluid cooler tube. Refer to CO-12, "Exploded View".8. Remove the A/T fluid cooler tube from the A/T assembly and engine assembly.
CAUTION:Be careful not to bend A/T fluid cooler tube.
INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.
AWD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005171855
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATIONAdjustment A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-146, "Adjustment".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATIONCheck A/T fluid leakage.
TM-197Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONTRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY2WD
2WD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171856
2WD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005171857
REMOVALCAUTION:• When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS)
from the A/T assembly.• Be careful not to damage sensor edge.1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.2. Remove air cleaner case (RH). Refer to EM-27, "Exploded View".3. Remove engine lower cover with power tool. Refer to EXT-31, "Exploded View".4. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".5. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-83, "Exploded View".6. Remove suspension member stay. Refer to FSU-18, "Exploded View".7. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
1. A/T assembly 2. Bracket
A. For tightening torque, refer to TM-198, "2WD : Removal and Installation".
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JSDIA1036GB
TM-198Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
8. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 connectors (A).
9. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 harness (B) from clips (1).10. Remove bracket (2) from transmission assembly.11. Remove control rod. Refer to TM-166, "Exploded View".12. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly.
Refer to EM-114, "Exploded View".CAUTION:• Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.• Never disassemble.• Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front edge magnetic area.• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
13. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-16, "Exploded View".14. Remove rear plate cover. Refer to EM-43, "Exploded View (2WD)".15. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four tightening bolts for drive
plate and torque converter.CAUTION:When turning the crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewedfrom the front of the engine.
16. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack.CAUTION:When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allowit to collide against the drain plug.
17. Remove rear engine mounting member with power tool. Refer toEM-79, "2WD : Exploded View".
18. Remove engine mounting insulator (rear). Refer to EM-79,"2WD : Exploded View".
19. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness clips.20. Remove air breather hose. Refer to TM-191, "2WD : Exploded View".21. Disconnect fluid cooler tube from A/T assembly. Refer to TM-194, "2WD : Exploded View".22. Remove bolts fixing A/T assembly to engine assembly with power tool.23. Remove A/T assembly from vehicle.
CAUTION:• Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.• Secure A/T assembly to a transmission jack.
24. Remove dynamic damper. Refer to EM-79, "2WD : ExplodedView".
INSTALLATIONNote the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal.
: Vehicle front
: Bolt
SCIA8269E
JPDIA0044ZZ
SCIA0499E
TM-199Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >• When installing A/T assembly to the engine assembly, be sure to
check dimension (A) to ensure it is within the reference value limit.
• When installing A/T assembly to the engine assembly, attach thefixing bolts in accordance with the following standard.
*: Tightening the bolt with bracket.
• Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those ofthe torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then,tighten the bolts with the specified torque.
CAUTION:• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the
front of the engine.• When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque converter
after fixing the crankshaft pulley bolts, be sure to confirm thetightening torque of the crankshaft pulley mounting bolts.Refer to EM-50, "Exploded View".
• Rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that A/Trotates freely without binding after converter is installed todrive plate.
• Install crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-114, "Exploded View".
2WD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005171858
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATIONAdjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-146, "Adjustment".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATIONCheck the following.• A/T fluid leakage.• A/T position. Refer to TM-158, "2WD : Inspection and Adjustment".AWD
B : Scale
C : Straightedge
Dimension (A) : Refer to TM-276, "Torque Converter"
JPDIA0042ZZ
A : View from vehicle front
: Transmission to engine
: Engine to transmission
Bolt symbol B C
Number of bolts 8 4
Bolt lengthmm (in)
65 (2.56) 35 (1.38)
Tightening torqueN·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
75 (7.7, 55) 46.6 (4.8, 34)
JSDIA1038ZZ
JPDIA0044ZZ
TM-200Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
AWD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171859
AWD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005171860
REMOVALCAUTION:• When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS)
from the A/T assembly.• Be careful not to damage sensor edge.1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.2. Remove air cleaner case (RH). Refer to EM-27, "Exploded View".3. Remove engine lower cover and front under cover with power tool. Refer to EXT-31, "Exploded View".4. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler and with power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".5. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-91, "Exploded View".6. Remove front cross bar with power tool. Refer to FSU-37, "Exploded View".7. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
1. A/T assembly 2. Bracket
A. For tightening torque, Refer to TM-198, "2WD : Removal and Installation".
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JSDIA1037GB
TM-201Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >8. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 connectors (A).
9. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 harness (B) from clips (1).10. Remove bracket (2) from transmission assembly.11. Remove three way catalyst (right bank). Refer to EX-5,
"Exploded View".12. Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-77, "Exploded
View".13. Remove control rod. Refer to TM-166, "Exploded View".14. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly. Refer to EM-114, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:• Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.• Never disassemble.• Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front edge magnetic area.• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
15. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-16, "Exploded View".16. Remove rear plate cover. Refer to EM-44, "Exploded View (AWD)".17. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four tightening bolts for drive
plate and torque converter.CAUTION:When turning the crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewedfrom the front of the engine.
18. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack.CAUTION:When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allowit to collide against the drain plug.
19. Remove rear engine mounting member with power tool. Refer toEM-83, "AWD : Exploded View".
20. Remove engine mounting insulator (rear). Refer to EM-83,"AWD : Exploded View".
21. Remove dynamic damper. Refer to EM-83, "AWD : Exploded View".22. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness clips.23. Remove air breather hose. Refer to TM-192, "AWD : Exploded View".24. Disconnect fluid cooler tube from the A/T assembly. Refer to TM-196, "AWD : Exploded View".25. Remove bolts fixing A/T assembly to engine assembly with power tool.26. Remove A/T assembly with transfer assembly from vehicle.
CAUTION:• Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.• Secure A/T assembly to a transmission jack.
27. Remove transfer assembly from A/T assembly with power tool.Refer to DLN-52, "Exploded View".
INSTALLATIONNote the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal.
: Vehicle front
: Bolt
SCIA8269E
JPDIA0044ZZ
SCIA2203E
TM-202Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
T
• When installing A/T assembly to the engine assembly, be sure tocheck dimension (A) to ensure it is within the reference value limit.
• When installing A/T assembly to the engine assembly, attach thefixing bolts in accordance with the following standard.
• Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those ofthe torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then,tighten the bolts with the specified torque.
CAUTION:• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the
front of the engine.• When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque converter
after fixing the crankshaft pulley bolts, be sure to confirm thetightening torque of the crankshaft pulley mounting bolts.Refer to EM-50, "Exploded View".
• Rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that A/Trotates freely without binding after converter is installed todrive plate.
• Install crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-114, "Exploded View".
AWD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005171861
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATIONAdjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-146, "Adjustment".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATIONCheck the following.• A/T fluid leakage.• A/T position. Refer to TM-158, "AWD : Inspection and Adjustment".
B : Scale
C : Straightedge
Dimension (A) : Refer to TM-276, "Torque Converter"
JPDIA0042ZZ
A : View from vehicle front
: Transmission to engine
: Engine to transmission
Bolt symbol B C
Number of bolts 8 4
Bolt lengthmm (in)
65 (2.56) 35 (1.38)
Tightening torqueN·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
75 (7.7, 55) 46.6 (4.8, 34)
JPDIA0043ZZ
JPDIA0044ZZ
TM-203Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLYTRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171862
JPDIA0556GB
TM-204Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
1. O-ring 2. Oil pump cover 3. O-ring
4. Oil pump housing 5. Self-sealing bolt 6. Torque converter
7. Converter housing 8. Oil pump housing oil seal 9. Bearing race
10. Needle bearing 11. O-ring 12. Front carrier assembly
13. Needle bearing 14. Snap ring 15. Front sun gear
16. 3rd one-way clutch 17. Snap ring 18. Bearing race
19. Needle bearing 20. Seal ring 21. Input clutch assembly
22. Needle bearing 23. Rear internal gear 24. Brake band
25. Mid carrier assembly 26. Needle bearing 27. Bearing race
28. Rear carrier assembly 29. Needle bearing 30. Mid sun gear
31. Seal ring 32. Rear sun gear 33. 1st one-way clutch
34. Snap ring 35. Needle bearing 36. High and low reverse clutch hub
37. Snap ring 38. Bearing race 39. Needle bearing
: Apply Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-18, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
TM-205Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
1. Needle bearing 2. Bearing race 3. High and low reverse clutch assembly
4. Needle bearing 5. Direct clutch assembly 6. Reverse brake dish plate
7. Reverse brake dish plate 8. Reverse brake driven plate 9. N-spring
10. Reverse brake drive plate 11. Reverse brake retaining plate 12. Snap ring
13. D-ring 14. D-ring 15. Reverse brake piston
SCIA8365E
TM-206Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
2WD
16. Return spring 17. Spring retainer 18. Snap ring
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JSDIA1039GB
1. Rear oil seal 2. Self-sealing bolt 3. Rear extension
4. Parking actuator support 5. Parking pawl 6. Return spring
7. Pawl shaft 8. Seal ring 9. Needle bearing
10. Output speed sensor 11. Parking gear 12. Output shaft
TM-207Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
13. Bearing race 14. Needle bearing 15. Manual plate
16. Parking rod 17. Manual shaft oil seal 18. Manual shaft
19. O-ring 20. Band servo anchor end pin 21. Detent spring
22. Spacer 23. Seal ring 24. Snap ring
25. Return spring 26. O-ring 27. Servo assembly
28. Snap ring 29. Sub-harness 30. Control valve with TCM
31. Bracket 32. A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 33. Clip
34. Oil pan mounting bolt 35. Overflow plug 36. Oil pan
37. Magnet 38. Drain plug 39. Drain plug gasket
40. Oil pan gasket 41. Terminal cord assembly 42. O-ring
43. Retaining pin 44. Transmission case
A. For tightening torque, refer to TM-232, "Assembly".
*: Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-18, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
TM-208Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
AWD
JSDIA0944GB
1. Rear oil seal 2. Bracket 3. Adapter case
4. Parking actuator support 5. Parking pawl 6. Return spring
7. Pawl shaft 8. Self-sealing bolt 9. Seal ring
10. Needle bearing 11. Gasket 12. Output speed sensor
13. Parking gear 14. Output shaft 15. Bearing race
16. Needle bearing 17. Manual plate 18. Parking rod
TM-209Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
19. Manual shaft oil seal 20. Manual shaft 21. O-ring
22. Band servo anchor end pin 23. Detent spring 24. Spacer
25. Seal ring 26. Snap ring 27. Return spring
28. O-ring 29. Servo assembly 30. Snap ring
31. Sub-harness 32. Control valve with TCM 33. Bracket
34. A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 35. Clip 36. Oil pan mounting bolt
37. Overflow plug 38. Oil pan 39. Magnet
40. Drain plug 41. Drain plug gasket 42. Oil pan gasket
43. Terminal cord assembly 44. O-ring 45. Retaining pin
46. Transmission case
A. For tightening torque, refer to TM-232, "Assembly".
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
TM-210Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
Oil Channel INFOID:0000000005171863
2WD
JSDIA0623GB
TM-211Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >AWD
JSDIA0625GB
TM-212Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap RingsINFOID:0000000005171864
2WD
SCIA8291E
Snap ring Needle bearing
Item number Outer diameter mm (in) Item number Outer diameter mm (in)
1 67.5 (2.657) 10 80 (3.149)
2 182.4 (7.181) 11 77 (3.031)
3 171.5 (6.751) 12 77 (3.031)
4 70.5 (2.776) 13 47 (1.850)
5 169 (6.653) 14 84 (3.307)
6 134.3 (5.287) 15 84 (3.307)
7 180.5 (7.106) 16 92 (3.622)
8 181 (7.125) 17 60 (2.362)
9 48.4 (1.906) 18 63 (2.480)
— — 19 92 (3.622)
— — 20 65 (2.559)
— — 21 60 (2.362)
TM-213Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >AWD
Disassembly INFOID:0000000005171865
CAUTION:Do not disassemble parts behind Drum Support. Refer to TM-19, "Cross-Sectional View".
JPDIA0105ZZ
Snap ring Needle bearing
Item number Outer diameter mm (in) Item number Outer diameter mm (in)
1 67.5 (2.657) 10 80 (3.149)
2 182.4 (7.181) 11 77 (3.031)
3 171.5 (6.751) 12 77 (3.031)
4 70.5 (2.776) 13 47 (1.850)
5 169 (6.653) 14 84 (3.307)
6 134.3 (5.287) 15 84 (3.307)
7 180.5 (7.106) 16 92 (3.622)
8 181 (7.125) 17 60 (2.362)
9 48.4 (1.906) 18 63 (2.480)
— — 19 92 (3.622)
— — 20 65 (2.559)
— — 21 60 (2.362)
TM-214Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.2. Remove torque converter by holding it firmly and turning while
pulling straight out.
3. Remove tightening bolts ( ) for converter housing and trans-mission case.
4. Remove converter housing from transmission case.CAUTION:Be careful not to scratch converter housing.
5. Remove O-ring from input clutch assembly.
6. Remove tightening bolts for oil pump assembly and transmis-sion case.
SCIA5010E
SCIA8096E
SCIA5011E
SCIA2300E
TM-215Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >7. Attach the sliding hammers to oil pump assembly and extract it
evenly from transmission case.CAUTION:• Fully tighten the sliding hammer screws.• Make sure that bearing race is installed to the oil pump
assembly edge surface.
8. Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly.
9. Remove bearing race from oil pump assembly.
10. Remove needle bearing from front sun gear.
SCIA5474E
SCIA5172E
SCIA6529E
SCIA2808E
TM-216Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
11. Remove front sun gear assembly from front carrier assembly.NOTE:Remove front sun gear by rotating left/right.
12. Remove seal rings from input clutch assembly.
13. Remove front carrier assembly from rear carrier assembly. (Withinput clutch assembly and rear internal gear.)CAUTION:Be careful to remove it with needle bearing.
14. Loosen lock nut and remove band servo anchor end pin fromtransmission case.
15. Remove brake band from transmission case.
SCIA5014E
SCIA2470E
SCIA5015E
SCIA6512E
SCIA2580E
TM-217Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
• To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do notstretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removingthe brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown inthe figure at right.Leave the clip in position after removing the brake band.
• Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear orburns.
16. Remove mid carrier assembly and rear carrier assembly as aunit.
17. Remove mid carrier assembly from rear carrier assembly.
18. Remove needle bearing (front side) from mid carrier assembly.
19. Remove needle bearing (rear side) from mid carrier assembly.
SAT655
SCIA5017E
SCIA5697E
SCIA2805E
SCIA2804E
TM-218Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
20. Remove bearing race from rear carrier assembly.
21. Remove needle bearing from rear carrier assembly.
22. Remove mid sun gear assembly, rear sun gear assembly andhigh and low reverse clutch hub as a unit.CAUTION:Be careful to remove then with bearing race and needlebearing.
23. Remove high and low reverse clutch assembly from direct clutchassembly.CAUTION:Make sure that needle bearing is installed to the high andlow reverse clutch assembly edge surface.
24. Remove direct clutch assembly from reverse brake.
SCIA5175E
SCIA2803E
SCIA5018E
SCIA2306E
SCIA5019E
TM-219Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
25. Remove needle bearing from drum support.
26. Remove snap ring (1) from A/T assembly connector (A).
27. Push A/T assembly connector (A).CAUTION:Be careful not to damage connector.
28. Remove clips (1).
29. Remove oil pan (2) and oil pan gasket.
30. Remove magnets (1) from oil pan.
SCIA5198E
JPDIA0007ZZ
JPDIA0008ZZ
: Front
: Oil pan mounting bolt
JSDIA0937ZZ
JPDIA0009ZZ
TM-220Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
31. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector (A).CAUTION:Be careful not to damage connector.
32. Disengage terminal clips ( ).
33. Disconnect output speed sensor connector (A).CAUTION:Be careful not to damage connector.
34. Disengage terminal clip ( ).
35. Remove bolts (A), (B) and (C) from control valve with TCM.
36. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.CAUTION:When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch andmanual plate height. Remove it vertically.
37. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (1) with bracket (2) fromcontrol valve with TCM.
SCIA8124E
JPDIA0011ZZ
: Front
SCIA8077E
SCIA5260E
: Bolt
JPDIA0013ZZ
TM-221Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
38. Remove bracket (1) from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (2).
39. Remove O-ring (1) from A/T assembly connector (A).
40. Disconnect TCM connectors (A) and (B).CAUTION:Be careful not to damage connectors.
41. Remove A/T assembly connector (A) from control valve withTCM with a flat-bladed screwdriver (B).
42. Disconnect TCM connector (A) and transmission range switchconnector (B).CAUTION:Be careful not to damage connectors.
JPDIA0014ZZ
JPDIA0015ZZ
JPDIA0016ZZ
JPDIA0017ZZ
JPDIA0018ZZ
TM-222Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
43. Remove rear extension assembly (2WD) or adapter case assembly (AWD) according to the following pro-cedures.
a. 2WDi. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and trans-
mission case.
ii. Tap rear extension assembly with a soft hammer.
iii. Remove rear extension assembly from transmission case. (Withneedle bearing).
iv. Remove bearing race from output shaft.
1 : Self-sealing bolt
A : Bolt
JPDIA0026ZZ
SCIA5028E
SCIA5029E
SCIA5245E
TM-223Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >v. Remove output shaft from transmission case by rotating left/
right.
vi. Remove parking gear (1) from output shaft (2).
vii. Remove seal rings (1) from output shaft.
b. AWD
SCIA5030E
JPDIA0029ZZ
JPDIA0030ZZ
TM-224Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
i. Remove tightening bolts (1) for adapter case assembly andtransmission case. [With bracket (2).]
ii. Tap adapter case assembly with a soft hammer.
iii. Remove adapter case assembly from transmission case. (Withneedle bearing)
iv. Remove gasket from transmission case.
3 : Self-sealing bolt
: Bolt
SCIA6910E
SCIA5201E
SCIA5186E
SCIA5231E
TM-225Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >v. Remove bearing race from output shaft.
vi. Remove output shaft from transmission case by rotating left/right.
vii. Remove parking gear (1) from output shaft (2).
viii. Remove seal rings (1) from output shaft.
44. Remove needle bearing from transmission case.
SCIA5245E
SCIA5030E
JPDIA0029ZZ
JPDIA0030ZZ
SCIA5031E
TM-226Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
45. Remove output speed sensor (1) from transmission case.CAUTION:• Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.• Never disassemble.• Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front
edge magnetic area.• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
46. Remove reverse brake snap ring (fixing plate) with two flat-bladed screwdrivers.NOTE:Press out snap ring from the transmission case oil pan side gapusing a flat-bladed screwdriver, and remove it using a anotherscrewdriver.
47. Remove reverse brake retaining plate from transmission case.• Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary,
replace the plate.
48. Remove N-spring from transmission case.
49. Remove reverse brake drive plates, driven plates, dish platesand retaining plate transmission case.• Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary,
replace the plate.
50. Remove snap ring (fixing spring retainer) using a flat-bladedscrewdriver.
: Bolt
SCIA2320E
SCIA5032E
SCIA5214E
SCIA2322E
SCIA2323E
TM-227Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
51. Remove spring retainer and return spring from transmissioncase.
52. Remove seal rings from drum support.
53. Remove needle bearing from drum support edge surface.
54. Remove reverse brake piston from transmission case with com-pressed air. Refer to TM-211, "Oil Channel".CAUTION:Care should be taken not to abruptly blow air. It makes pis-tons incline, as the result, it becomes hard to disassemblethe pistons.
SCIA2324E
SCIA3333E
SCIA2796E
SCIA5047E
TM-228Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
55. Remove D-rings from reverse brake piston.
56. Use a pin punch [4 mm (0.16 in) dia. commercial service tool] toknock out retaining pin.
57. Remove retaining pin with pair of nippers.
58. Remove manual plate (with parking rod) from manual shaft.
59. Remove parking rod from manual plate.
SCIA6330E
SCIA2328E
SCIA2329E
SCIA5715E
SCIA5220E
TM-229Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
60. Remove manual shaft from transmission case.
61. Remove manual shaft oil seals with a flat-bladed screwdriver.CAUTION:Be careful not to scratch transmission case.
62. Remove detent spring and spacer from transmission case.
63. Remove snap ring from transmission case with pair of snap ringpliers.
64. Remove servo assembly (with return spring) from transmissioncase.
SCIA5716E
SCIA2331E
SCIA5248E
SCIA2333E
SCIA5679E
TM-230Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
65. Remove return spring from servo assembly.
66. Remove O-rings from servo assembly.
67. Remove needle bearing (1) from rear extension (2WD) oradapter case (AWD).
68. Remove parking actuator support from rear extension (2WD) oradapter case (AWD).
69. Remove parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft fromrear extension (2WD) or adapter case (AWD).
SCIA5717E
SCIA5719E
SCIA6179J
SCIA3423E
SCIA3424E
TM-231Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
70. Remove return spring (1) from parking pawl (2).
71. Remove rear oil seal from rear extension (2WD) or adapter case(AWD) with a flat-bladed screwdriver.CAUTION:Be careful not to scratch rear extension (2WD) or adaptercase (AWD).
Assembly INFOID:0000000005171866
1. As shown in the figure, use a drift [22 mm (0.87 in) dia. commer-cial service tool] to drive manual shaft oil seals into the transmis-sion case until it is flush.CAUTION:• Never reuse manual shaft oil seals.• Apply ATF to manual shaft oil seals.
SCIA6180J
SCIA5481E
SCIA5259E
TM-232Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
2. Install detent spring and spacer in transmission case. Tightendetent spring and spacer bolt to the specified torque.
3. Install manual shaft to transmission case.
4. Install parking rod to manual plate.
5. Install manual plate (with parking rod) to manual shaft.
6. Install retaining pin into the manual plate and manual shaft.a. Fit pinhole of the manual plate to pinhole of the manual shaft
with a pin punch.b. Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the manual plate.
CAUTION:Drive retaining pin to 2±0.5 mm (0.08±0.020 in) over themanual plate.
SCIA5248E
SCIA5716E
SCIA5220E
SCIA5715E
SCIA5297E
TM-233Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
7. Install retaining pin into the transmission case and manual shaft.a. Fit pinhole of the transmission case to pinhole of the manual
shaft with a pin punch.b. Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the transmission
case.CAUTION:Drive retaining pin to 5±1 mm (0.20±0.04 in) over the trans-mission case.
8. Install O-rings to servo assembly.
9. Install return spring to servo assembly.
10. Install servo assembly to transmission case.
11. Install snap ring to transmission case with a pair of snap ring pli-ers.
SCIA2427E
SCIA5719E
SCIA5717E
SCIA5679E
SCIA2333E
TM-234Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
12. Install D-rings to reverse brake piston.
13. Install reverse brake piston to transmission case.
14. Install needle bearing to drum support edge surface.CAUTION:Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-213,"Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, ThrustWashers and Snap Rings".
15. Install seal rings to drum support.
16. Install spring retainer and return spring to transmission case.
SCIA6330E
SCIA2325E
SCIA2796E
SCIA3333E
SCIA2324E
TM-235Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
17. Set the SST on spring retainer and install snap ring (fixing springretainer) to transmission case while compressing return spring.CAUTION:Securely assemble them with a flat-bladed screwdriver sothat snap ring tension is slightly weak.
18. Install reverse brake drive plates, driven plates, dish plates,retaining plate and snap ring to transmission case.
CAUTION:Check order of plates.
SCIA5877E
1 : Snap ring
2 : Retaining plate
3 : Drive plate
4 : Driven plate
5 : Dish plate
6/6 : Drive plate / Driven plate
JPDIA0568ZZ
TM-236Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
19. Assemble N-spring.20. Install reverse brake retaining plate to transmission case.
21. Install snap ring to transmission case.
22. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If notwithin specified clearance, select proper retaining plate.
23. Install needle bearing to transmission case.CAUTION:Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-213,"Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, ThrustWashers and Snap Rings".
SCIA5249E
SCIA2439E
Specified clearance “A”Standard: TM-276, "Reverse Brake".
Retaining plate: Refer to TM-276, "Reverse Brake"
SCIA3129E
SCIA5031E
TM-237Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >24. Install output speed sensor (1) to transmission case. Tighten
bolt ( ) to the specified torque.CAUTION:• Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.• Never disassemble.• Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front
edge magnetic area.• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
25. As shown in the figure, use the drift to drive rear oil seal into therear extension (2WD) or adapter case (AWD) until it is flush.CAUTION:• Never reuse rear oil seal.• Apply ATF to rear oil seal.
26. Install return spring (1) to parking pawl (2).
27. Install parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft to rearextension (2WD) or adapter case (AWD).
SCIA2320E
SCIA5477E
SCIA6180J
SCIA3424E
TM-238Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
28. Install parking actuator support to rear extension (2WD) oradapter case (AWD).
29. Install needle bearing (1) to rear extension (2WD) or adaptercase (AWD).CAUTION:Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-213,"Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, ThrustWashers and Snap Rings".
30. Install rear extension assembly (2WD) or adapter case assembly (AWD) according to the following proce-dures.
a. 2WDi. Install seal rings (1) to output shaft.
ii. Install parking gear (1) to output shaft (2).
SCIA3423E
SCIA6179J
JPDIA0030ZZ
JPDIA0029ZZ
TM-239Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >iii. Install output shaft to transmission case.
CAUTION:Be careful not to mistake front for rear because both sideslooks similar. (Thinner end is front side.)
iv. Install bearing race to output shaft.
v. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasketor equivalent. Refer to GI-18, "Recommended Chemical Prod-ucts and Sealants".) to rear extension assembly as shown in thefigure.
CAUTION:Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.from the transmission case and rear extension assemblymounting surfaces.
vi. Install rear extension assembly to transmission case.CAUTION:Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pawl andthe parking actuator support when assembling the rearextension assembly.
SCIA5030E
SCIA5245E
A : Start and finish point shall be in the center of two bolts.
B : 3 – 5 mm (0.12 – 0.20 in)Sealant width (C)
: 1.0 – 2.0 mm (0.04 – 0.08 in)
Sealant height (C)
: 0.4 – 1.0 mm (0.016 – 0.04 in)
JPDIA0036ZZ
SCIA5029E
TM-240Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
vii. Tighten rear extension assembly bolts to the specified torque.
b. AWDi. Install seal rings (1) to output shaft.
ii. Install parking gear (1) to output shaft (2).
iii. Install output shaft in transmission case.CAUTION:Be careful not to mistake front for rear because both sideslooks similar. (Thinner end is front side.)
1 : Self-sealing bolt
A : Bolt
JPDIA0026ZZ
JPDIA0030ZZ
JPDIA0029ZZ
SCIA5030E
TM-241Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >iv. Install bearing race to output shaft.
v. Install gasket onto transmission case.CAUTION:• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.
from the transmission case and adapter case assemblymounting surfaces.
• Never reuse gasket.
vi. Install adapter case assembly to transmission case.CAUTION:Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pawl andthe parking actuator support when assembling the adaptercase assembly.
vii. Tighten adapter case assembly bolts (1) to the specified torque.[With bracket (2).]
SCIA5245E
SCIA5231E
SCIA5186E
3 : Self-sealing bolt
: Bolt
SCIA6910E
TM-242Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
31. Install needle bearing in drum support.CAUTION:Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-213,"Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, ThrustWashers and Snap Rings".
32. Install direct clutch assembly in reverse brake.CAUTION:Make sure that drum support edge surface and direct clutchinner boss edge surface come to almost same place.
33. Install high and low reverse clutch assembly in direct clutch.
34. Align the drive plate with a flat-bladed screwdriver.
35. Install high and low reverse clutch hub, mid sun gear assemblyand rear sun gear assembly as a unit.
SCIA5198E
SCIA5019E
SCIA2306E
SCIA3169E
SCIA5018E
TM-243Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
CAUTION:Make sure that portion “A” of high and low reverse clutchdrum protrudes approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond por-tion “B” of rear sun gear.
36. Install needle bearing to rear carrier assembly.CAUTION:Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-213,"Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, ThrustWashers and Snap Rings".
37. Install bearing race to rear carrier assembly.CAUTION:Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-213,"Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, ThrustWashers and Snap Rings".
38. Install rear carrier assembly to direct clutch drum.
SCIA3130E
SCIA2803E
SCIA5175E
SCIA2462E
TM-244Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
39. Install needle bearing (rear side) to mid carrier assembly.CAUTION:Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-213,"Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, ThrustWashers and Snap Rings".
40. Install needle bearing (front side) to mid carrier assembly.CAUTION:Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-213,"Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, ThrustWashers and Snap Rings".
41. Install mid carrier assembly to rear carrier assembly.
42. Install front carrier assembly, input clutch assembly and rearinternal gear as a unit.
43. Install seal rings to input clutch assembly.
SCIA2804E
SCIA2805E
SCIA5017E
SCIA5015E
SCIA2470E
TM-245Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
44. Install band servo anchor end pin and lock nut to transmissioncase.
45. Install brake band to transmission case.CAUTION:Assemble it so that identification to avoid incorrect installa-tion faces servo side.
46. Install front sun gear assembly to front carrier assembly.CAUTION:Apply ATF to front sun gear bearing and 3rd one-way clutchend bearing.
47. Install needle bearing to front sun gear.CAUTION:Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-213,"Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, ThrustWashers and Snap Rings".
48. Adjust brake band tilting using a clip so that brake band contactsfront sun gear drum evenly.
SCIA6512E
SCIA5498E
SCIA5014E
SCIA2808E
SCIA5033E
TM-246Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
49. Adjust brake band.a. Loosen lock nut.b. Tighten band servo anchor end pin to specified torque.
c. Back of band servo anchor end pin three turns.d. Holding band servo anchor end pin, tighten lock nut to the spec-
ified torque.
50. Adjustment of total end play.• Measure clearance between front sun gear and bearing race
for oil pump cover.• Select proper thickness of bearing race so that end play is
within specifications.
a. Measure dimensions “K” and “L” and then calculate dimension“J”.
i. Measure dimension “K”.
: 5.0 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb)
SCIA5498E
SCIA2810E
SCIA7073E
SCIA7074E
TM-247Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >ii. Measure dimension “L”.iii. Calculate dimension “J”.
b. Measure dimensions “M1” and “M2” and then calculate dimen-sion “M”.
i. Place bearing race and needle bearing on oil pump assembly.
ii. Measure dimension “M1”.
iii. Measure dimension “M2”.
“J” : Distance between oil pump fitting surface of transmission case and needle bearing mating surface of front sun gear.J = K – L
SCIA5352E
SCIA3125E
SCIA3124E
SCIA3126E
SCIA3127E
TM-248Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
iv. Calculate dimension “M”.
c. Adjust total end play “T1”.
• Select proper thickness of bearing race so that total end playis within specifications.
51. Install O-ring to oil pump assembly.
52. Install bearing race to oil pump assembly.
53. Install oil pump assembly to transmission case.CAUTION:Apply ATF to oil pump bearing.
“M” : Distance between transmission case fitting surface of oil pump and needle bearing on oil pump.M = M1– M2
SCIA3125E
T1 = J – MTotal end play “T1” : Refer to TM-276, "Total End
Play".
Bearing races : Refer to TM-276, "Total End Play".SCIA2810E
SCIA5172E
SCIA6529E
SCIA2811E
TM-249Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
54. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant orequivalent. Refer to GI-18, "Recommended Chemical Productsand Sealants".) to oil pump assembly as shown in the figure.CAUTION:Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.from the oil pump mounting bolts and oil pump mountingbolt mounting surfaces.
55. Tighten oil pump bolts to the specified torque.CAUTION:Apply ATF to oil pump bushing.
56. Install O-ring to input clutch assembly.
57. Install converter housing to transmission case, and then tightenconverter housing bolts (A) and self-sealing bolt (B) to the spec-ified torque.
58. Make sure that brake band (A) does not close input speed sen-sor holes (B).
SCIA5321E
SCIA2300E
SCIA5011E
SCIA8085E
JPDIA0020ZZ
TM-250Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
59. Connect TCM connector (A) and transmission range switch con-nector (B).
60. Install A/T assembly connector (A) to control valve with TCM.
61. Connect TCM connectors (A) and (B).
62. Install O-ring (1) to A/T assembly connector (A).
63. Install bracket (1) to A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (2).
JPDIA0018ZZ
JPDIA0019ZZ
JPDIA0016ZZ
JPDIA0015ZZ
JPDIA0014ZZ
TM-251Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
64. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (1) [with bracket (2)] tocontrol valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2bolt to the specified torque.CAUTION:Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve.
65. Install control valve with TCM to transmission case.CAUTION:• Make sure that input speed sensor securely installs input
speed sensor holes (B).
• Hang down output speed sensor harness toward outsideso as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM.
• Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valvewith TCM to terminal hole of transmission case.
• Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged withmanual plate projection.
66. Install bolts (A), (B) and (C) in control valve with TCM. Tightenbolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After thattighten them in order (1 → 2 → 3), and then tighten other bolts.Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque.
JPDIA0013ZZ
A : Brake band
JPDIA0020ZZ
SCIA5035E
: Front
Bolt symbol A B C
Number of bolts 5 6 1
Length mm (in) 42 (1.65) 55 (2.17) 40 (1.57)
Tightening torqueN·m (km-g, in-lb)
7.9 (0.81, 70)With ATF applied
7.9 (0.81, 70)
SCIA8078E
TM-252Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
67. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector (A).68. Engage terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sen-
sor 2 harness with terminal clips ( ).
69. Connect output speed sensor connector (A).70. Engage output speed sensor harness with terminal clip ( ).
71. Pull down A/T assembly connector.CAUTION:Be careful not to damage connector.
72. Install snap ring to A/T assembly connector.
73. Install magnets (1) to oil pan.
SCIA8124E
JPDIA0011ZZ
JSDIA1081ZZ
JSDIA1082ZZ
JPDIA0009ZZ
TM-253Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
74. Install oil pan gasket to transmission case.CAUTION:• Do not reuse oil pan gasket.• Install it in the direction to align hole positions.• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface.
75. Install oil pan (2) and clips (1) to transmission case.
CAUTION:• Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as
shown in the figure.• Be careful not to pinch harnesses.• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.
from oil pan mounting surface.
76. Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numeri-cal order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them.Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:Never reuse oil pan mounting bolts.
77. Install drain plug to oil pan. Tighten drain plug to the specifiedtorque.CAUTION:Never reuse drain plug gasket.
78. Pour ATF into torque converter.• Approximately 2 liter (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 Imp qt) of ATF is
required for a new torque converter.• When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount
of ATF as was drained.
79. Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque con-verter with notches of oil pump.CAUTION:Install torque converter while rotating it.
: Front
: Oil pan mounting bolt
JSDIA0937ZZ
: Front
JSDIA0941ZZ
SAT428DA
SCIA5010E
TM-254Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
80. Measure dimension (A) to make sure that torque converter is inproper position.
Inspection INFOID:0000000005171867
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL• Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of mal-
function. If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreignparticles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replace-ment. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish buildup. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and caninhibit pump pressure.
- If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid coolercleaning. Refer to TM-148, "Cleaning".
• Check torque converter one-way clutch using a check tool asshown at figure.
1. Insert a check tool into the groove of bearing support built intoone-way clutch outer race.
2. When fixing bearing support with a check tool, rotate one-wayclutch spline using a screwdriver.
3.Make sure that inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replacetorque converter assembly.
B : Scale
C : Straightedge
Dimension (A) : Refer to TM-276, "Torque Convert-er".
JPDIA0042ZZ
SCIA5199E
SCIA3171E
TM-255Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]OIL PUMP
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
OIL PUMP
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171868
Disassembly INFOID:0000000005171869
1. Remove oil pump housing from oil pump cover.
2. Remove oil pump housing oil seal with a flat-bladed screwdriver.CAUTION:Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.
1. O-ring 2. Oil pump cover 3. O-ring
4. Oil pump housing 5. Oil pump housing oil seal
SCIA5227E
SCIA5228E
SCIA2840E
TM-256Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
OIL PUMP[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
3. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing.
4. Remove O-ring from oil pump cover.
Assembly INFOID:0000000005171870
1. Install O-ring to oil pump cover.
2. Install O-ring to oil pump housing.
SCIA2841E
SCIA5230E
SCIA5230E
SCIA2841E
TM-257Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]OIL PUMP
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >3. Using the drift, install oil pump housing oil seal to the oil pump
housing until it is flush.CAUTION:• Never reuse oil seal.• Apply ATF to oil seal.
4. Install oil pump housing to oil pump cover.
5. Tighten bolts ( ) to the specified torque in numerical ordershown in the figure after temporarily tightening them.
SCIA5313E
JSDIA0133ZZ
TM-258Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
FRONT SUN GEAR, 3RD ONE-WAY CLUTCH[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
FRONT SUN GEAR, 3RD ONE-WAY CLUTCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171871
Disassembly INFOID:0000000005171872
1. Remove snap ring from front sun gear with a flat-bladed screw-driver.
2. Remove 3rd one-way clutch from front sun gear.
1. Front sun gear 2. 3rd one-way clutch 3. Snap ring
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
SCIA8368E
SCIA3110E
SCIA3111E
TM-259Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]FRONT SUN GEAR, 3RD ONE-WAY CLUTCH
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
Assembly INFOID:0000000005171873
1. Install 3rd one-way clutch to front sun gear.
2. Install snap ring to front sun gear with a flat-bladed screwdriver.
3. Check operation of 3rd one-way clutch.a. Hold oil pump assembly and turn front sun gear.b. Check 3rd one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking
directions.CAUTION:If not as shown in figure, check installation direction of 3rdone-way clutch.
Inspection INFOID:0000000005171874
• 3rd One-way ClutchCheck frictional surface for wear or damage.CAUTION:If necessary, replace the 3rd one-way clutch.
• Front Sun Gear Snap RingCheck for deformation, fatigue or damage.CAUTION:If necessary, replace the snap ring.
• Front Sun GearCheck for deformation, fatigue or damage.CAUTION:If necessary, replace the front sun gear.
SCIA3111E
SCIA3110E
SCIA3131E
TM-260Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
FRONT CARRIER, INPUT CLUTCH, REAR INTERNAL GEAR[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
FRONT CARRIER, INPUT CLUTCH, REAR INTERNAL GEAR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171875
1. Seal ring 2. O-ring 3. Needle bearing
4. Bearing race 5. Front carrier assembly 6. Needle bearing
7. Snap ring 8. Snap ring 9. Retaining plate
10. Driven plate 11. Input clutch drum 12. Dish plate
13. Drive plate 14. Rear internal gear
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JPDIA0558ZZ
TM-261Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]FRONT CARRIER, INPUT CLUTCH, REAR INTERNAL GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
Disassembly INFOID:0000000005171876
1. Compress snap ring with two flat-bladed screwdrivers.2. Remove front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly from
rear internal gear.3. Remove front carrier assembly from input clutch assembly.
4. Remove bearing race from front carrier assembly.
5. Remove needle bearing from front carrier assembly.
6. Remove snap ring from front carrier assembly.CAUTION:Never expand snap ring excessively.
SCIA5339E
SCIA2847E
SCIA5233E
SCIA5476E
TM-262Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
FRONT CARRIER, INPUT CLUTCH, REAR INTERNAL GEAR[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
7. Remove O-ring and seal rings from input clutch assembly.
8. Remove needle bearing from input clutch assembly.
9. Remove snap ring from input clutch drum with a flat-bladedscrewdriver.
10. Remove drive plates, driven plates, dish plate and retainingplate from input clutch drum.
Assembly INFOID:0000000005171877
1. Install drive plates, driven plates, dish plate, retaining plate andsnap ring to input clutch drum.
CAUTION:Check order of plates.
SCIA5235E
SCIA2853E
SCIA2864E
1 : Snap ring
2 : Retaining plate
3 : Drive plate
4 : Driven plate
5 : Dish plate
7 /7 : Drive plate / Driven plate
JPDIA0557ZZ
TM-263Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]FRONT CARRIER, INPUT CLUTCH, REAR INTERNAL GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >2. Install snap ring to input clutch drum with a flat-bladed screw-
driver.
3. Install needle bearing to input clutch assembly.CAUTION:Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-213,"Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, ThrustWashers and Snap Rings".
4. Install O-ring and seal rings to input clutch assembly.
5. Install snap ring to front carrier assembly.CAUTION:Never expand snap ring excessively.
6. Install needle bearing to front carrier assembly.CAUTION:Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-213,"Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, ThrustWashers and Snap Rings".
SCIA2864E
SCIA2853E
SCIA5235E
SCIA5476E
SCIA5233E
TM-264Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
FRONT CARRIER, INPUT CLUTCH, REAR INTERNAL GEAR[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
7. Install bearing race to front carrier assembly.8. Install front carrier assembly to input clutch assembly.
9. Compress snap ring with two flat-bladed screwdrivers.10. Install front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly to rear
internal gear.
Inspection INFOID:0000000005171878
• Front Carrier Snap RingCheck for deformation, fatigue or damage.CAUTION:If necessary, replace the snap ring.
• Input Clutch Snap RingCheck for deformation, fatigue or damage.CAUTION:If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
• Input Clutch DrumCheck for deformation, fatigue or damage or burns.CAUTION:If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
• Input Clutch Drive Plates and Driven PlatesCheck facing for burns, cracks or damage.CAUTION:If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
• Input Clutch Retaining Plate and Dish PlateCheck facing for burns, cracks or damage.CAUTION:If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
• Front CarrierCheck for deformation, fatigue or damage.CAUTION:If necessary, replace the front carrier assembly.
• Rear Internal GearCheck for deformation, fatigue or damage.CAUTION:If necessary, replace the rear internal gear.
SCIA2847E
SCIA5339E
TM-265Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH HUB
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCHHUB
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171879
Disassembly INFOID:0000000005171880
1. Remove needle bearing and bearing race from high and lowreverse clutch hub.
2. Remove snap ring from mid sun gear assembly with pair of snapring pliers.CAUTION:Never expand snap ring excessively.
1. Needle bearing 2. Bearing race 3. Snap ring
4. High and low reverse clutch hub 5. Needle bearing 6. Snap ring
7. 1st one-way clutch 8. Rear sun gear 9. Seal ring
10. Mid sun gear
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
SCIA8369E
SCIA2854E
SCIA2855E
TM-266Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH HUB[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
3. Remove high and low reverse clutch hub from mid sun gearassembly.
4. Remove needle bearing from high and low reverse clutch hub.
5. Remove rear sun gear assembly from mid sun gear assembly.
6. Remove snap ring from rear sun gear with a flat-bladed screw-driver.
7. Remove 1st one-way clutch from rear sun gear.
SCIA2856E
SCIA2857E
SCIA7018E
SCIA2859E
SCIA4633E
TM-267Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH HUB
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
8. Remove seal rings from mid sun gear.
Assembly INFOID:0000000005171881
1. Install seal rings to mid sun gear.
2. Install 1st one-way clutch to rear sun gear.
3. Install snap ring to rear sun gear with a flat-bladed screwdriver.
SCIA2861E
SCIA2861E
SCIA4633E
SCIA2859E
TM-268Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH HUB[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
4. Install rear sun gear assembly to mid sun gear assembly.
5. Install needle bearing to high and low reverse clutch hub.CAUTION:Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-213,"Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, ThrustWashers and Snap Rings".
6. Install high and low reverse clutch hub to mid sun gear assem-bly.
7. Install snap ring to mid sun gear assembly with pair of snap ringpliers.CAUTION:Never expand snap ring excessively.
8. Check operation of 1st one-way clutch.a. Hold mid sun gear and turn rear sun gear.b. Check 1st one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking
directions.CAUTION:If not as shown in the figure, check installation direction of1st one-way clutch.
SCIA7018E
SCIA2857E
SCIA2856E
SCIA2855E
SCIA3132E
TM-269Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH HUB
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
9. Install needle bearing and bearing race to high and low reverseclutch hub.CAUTION:Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-213,"Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, ThrustWashers and Snap Rings".
Inspection INFOID:0000000005171882
• High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub Snap Ring, Rear Sun Gear Snap RingCheck for deformation, fatigue or damage.CAUTION:If necessary, replace the snap ring.
• 1st One-way ClutchCheck frictional surface for wear or damage.CAUTION:If necessary, replace the 1st one-way clutch.
• Mid Sun GearCheck for deformation, fatigue or damage.CAUTION:If necessary, replace the mid sun gear.
• Rear Sun GearCheck for deformation, fatigue or damage.CAUTION:If necessary, replace the rear sun gear.
• High and Low Reverse Clutch HubCheck for deformation, fatigue or damage.CAUTION:If necessary, replace the high and low reverse clutch hub.
SCIA2854E
TM-270Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171883
Disassembly INFOID:0000000005171884
1. Remove bearing race from high and low reverse clutch drum.
2. Remove snap ring from high and low reverse clutch drum with aflat-bladed screwdriver.
3. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from highand low reverse clutch drum.
Assembly INFOID:0000000005171885
1. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and snap ring to high and low reverse clutch drum.CAUTION:
1. High and low reverse clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate
4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate 6. Bearing race
SCIA5239E
SCIA5215E
SCIA2868E
TM-271Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >Check the order of plates.
2. Install snap ring to high and low reverse clutch drum with a flat-bladed screwdriver.
3. Install bearing race to high and low reverse clutch drum.CAUTION:Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-213,"Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, ThrustWashers and Snap Rings".
Inspection INFOID:0000000005171886
Check the following, and replace transmission assembly if necessary.• High and Low Reverse Clutch Snap Ring
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.• High and Low Reverse Clutch Drive Plates
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.• High and Low Reverse Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
1 : Snap ring
2 : Retaining plate
3 : Drive plate
4 : Driven plate
4/4 : Drive plate / Driven plate
SCIA6735E
SCIA2868E
SCIA5215E
TM-272Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
DIRECT CLUTCH[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
T
DIRECT CLUTCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005171887
Disassembly INFOID:0000000005171888
1. Remove snap ring from direct clutch drum with a flat-bladedscrewdriver.
2. Remove drive plates, driven plates, dish plate and retainingplates from direct clutch drum.
Assembly INFOID:0000000005171889
1. Install drive plates, driven plates, dish plate, retaining plates and snap ring to direct clutch drum.CAUTION:Check the order of plates.
1. Direct clutch drum 2. Dish plate 3. Driven plate
4. Retaining plate 5. Snap ring 6. Drive plate
JSDIA0969ZZ
SCIA2868E
1 : Snap ring
2 : Retaining plate
3 : Drive plate
4 : Driven plate
5 : Dish plate
5 / 5 : Drive plate / Driven plate
JSDIA0970ZZ
TM-273Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]DIRECT CLUTCH
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >2. Install snap ring to direct clutch drum with a flat-bladed screw-
driver.
Inspection INFOID:0000000005171890
Check the following, and replace direct clutch assembly if necessary.• Direct Clutch Snap Ring
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.• Direct Clutch Drive Plates and Driven Plates
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.• Direct Clutch Dish Plate and Retaining Plates
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
SCIA2868E
TM-274Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)[5AT: RE5R05A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
M
N
O
P
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
T
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specification INFOID:0000000005171891
• *1: Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• *2: The fluid capacity is the reference value. Check the fluid level with A/T fluid level gauge.
Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs INFOID:0000000005171892
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases INFOID:0000000005171893
• At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal OFF)
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
Stall Speed INFOID:0000000005171894
Applied modelVQ35HR engine
2WD AWD
Automatic transmission model RE5R05A
Transmission model code number 3FX3C 3FX3E
Stall torque ratio 1.74 : 1
Transmission gear ratio
1st 3.842
2nd 2.353
3rd 1.529
4th 1.000
5th 0.839
Reverse 2.765
Recommended fluid Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*1
Fluid capacity 10.3 liter (10-7/8 US qt, 9-1/8 Imp qt)*2
CAUTION:• If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used.• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T durability,
and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.
Throttle positionVehicle speed km/h (MPH)
D1→D2 D2→D3 D3→D4 D4→D5 D5→D4 D4→D3 D3→D2 D2→D1
Full throttle 70 – 74
(44 – 45)114 – 122(71 – 75)
172 – 182(107 – 113)
246 – 256(153 – 159)
242 – 252(151 – 156)
157 – 167(98 – 103)
98 – 106(61 – 65)
43 – 47(27 – 29)
Half throttle 47 – 51
(30 – 31)77 – 83
(48 – 51)100 – 108(63 – 67)
167 – 175(104 – 108)
137 – 145(86 – 90)
63 – 71(40 – 44)
32 – 38(20 – 23)
7 – 11(5 – 6)
Throttle positionVehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
Closed throttle 57 – 65 (36 – 40) 54 – 62 (34 – 38)
Half throttle 167 – 175 (104 – 108) 137 – 145 (86 – 90)
Stall speed 2,700 – 3,000 rpm
TM-275Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35
[5AT: RE5R05A]SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Line Pressure INFOID:0000000005171895
Input Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000005171896
Output Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000005171897
Reverse Brake INFOID:0000000005171898
Total End Play INFOID:0000000005171899
BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY
Torque Converter INFOID:0000000005171900
Engine speedLine pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
“R” position “D” and “M” positions
At idle speed 425 – 465 (4.4 – 4.7, 62 – 67) 379 – 428 (3.9 – 4.3, 55 – 62)
At stall speed 1,605 – 1,950 (16.4 – 19.8, 233 – 282) 1,310 – 1,500 (13.4 – 15.3, 190 – 217)
Name Condition Data (Approx.)
Input speed sensor 1When running at 50 km/h (31 MPH) in 4th speed witch the closed throttle position signal OFF.
1.3 kHz
Input speed sensor 2When running at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st speed witch the closed throttle position signal OFF.
Name Condition Data (Approx.)
Output speed sensor When running at 20 km/h (12 MPH). 185 Hz
Number of drive plates 6
Number of driven plates 6
Clearance mm (in) Standard 0.7 – 1.1 (0.028 – 0.043)
Thickness of retaining plates mm (in)
4.2 (0.165)4.4 (0.173)4.6 (0.181)4.8 (0.189)5.0 (0.197)5.2 (0.205) 5.4 (0.213)
Total end play mm (in) 0.25 – 0.55 (0.0098 – 0.0217)
Thickness mm (in)
0.8 (0.031)1.0 (0.039)1.2 (0.047)1.4 (0.055)1.6 (0.063)1.8 (0.071)
Distance between end of converter housing and torque converter mm (in)
25.0 (0.98)
TM-276Revision: 2009 August 2010 EX35